Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/NEWS @ 37850:c03ac59bab50
(print_preprocess, print_object): Test internedness of
symbols differently.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 21 May 2001 12:22:16 +0000 |
parents | 204ab89d55f0 |
children | 9447d0447996 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
36821 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15 |
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | |
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
30922 | 6 For older news, see the file ONEWS |
25853 | 7 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
8 |
25995 | 9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
10 | |
36039 | 11 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
12 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra | |
13 charsets in this release. | |
14 | |
30576 | 15 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
16 | |
31007 | 17 ** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
18 | |
28166 | 19 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
20 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
21 | |
22 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for | |
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
23 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
24 to list them. |
29696 | 25 |
29972 | 26 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs |
30786 | 27 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. |
30467
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
28 |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
29 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
30 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
31 |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
32 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
32182 | 33 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
33484 | 34 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
35 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any | |
36 necessary changes to unexec. | |
30576 | 37 |
32428 | 38 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
39 new display features described below. | |
40 | |
32865
34e286ed22a5
Say that Emacs can now be built on the Macintosh.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32845
diff
changeset
|
41 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
32966 | 42 all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
34204
10c8428f0fd1
Point to the Mac OS chapter in the docs.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34191
diff
changeset
|
43 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
10c8428f0fd1
Point to the Mac OS chapter in the docs.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34191
diff
changeset
|
44 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the |
10c8428f0fd1
Point to the Mac OS chapter in the docs.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34191
diff
changeset
|
45 description of aspects specific to the Mac. |
32428 | 46 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
47 |
28166 | 48 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
49 | |
36821 | 50 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
51 | |
52 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
53 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
54 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
55 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
56 the text. | |
57 | |
58 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
59 | |
60 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
61 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
62 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
63 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
64 specify a font. | |
65 | |
66 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
67 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
68 under Lisp changes, below. | |
69 | |
70 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
71 | |
72 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
73 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
74 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
75 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
76 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
77 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored | |
78 on terminals. | |
79 | |
80 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now | |
81 supported on character terminals. | |
82 | |
83 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. | |
84 | |
85 +++ | |
86 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | |
87 | |
88 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are | |
89 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it | |
90 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum | |
91 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: | |
92 | |
93 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
94 | |
95 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
96 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
97 specifies a number of lines. | |
98 | |
99 Default is 0.25. | |
100 | |
101 - User option: resize-mini-windows | |
102 | |
103 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always | |
104 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows | |
105 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk | |
106 again. | |
107 | |
108 Default is `grow-only'. | |
109 | |
110 ** LessTif support. | |
111 | |
112 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see | |
37155
28fe777ce995
Change version of LessTif that's required.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37077
diff
changeset
|
113 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later. |
36821 | 114 |
115 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
116 | |
117 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
118 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is | |
119 non-nil. | |
120 | |
121 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
122 | |
123 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for | |
124 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when | |
125 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
126 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
127 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
128 Emacs. | |
129 | |
130 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
131 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
132 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
133 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
134 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
135 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
136 | |
137 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
138 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
139 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
140 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
141 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
142 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
143 | |
144 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
145 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
146 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
37156 | 147 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since |
36821 | 148 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. |
149 | |
150 +++ | |
151 ** Automatic Hscrolling | |
152 | |
153 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if | |
154 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
155 customized. | |
156 | |
157 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or | |
158 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound | |
159 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll | |
160 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more | |
161 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. | |
162 | |
163 +++ | |
164 ** Tool bar support. | |
165 | |
166 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
167 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level | |
168 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is | |
169 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved | |
170 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome | |
171 icons will be used. | |
172 | |
173 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons | |
174 for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would | |
36885 | 175 also be useful to touch up some of the PBM icons manually. |
36821 | 176 |
177 +++ | |
178 ** Tooltips. | |
179 | |
180 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
181 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can | |
182 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
183 | |
184 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
185 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
186 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
187 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
188 | |
189 +++ | |
190 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor | |
191 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is | |
192 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option | |
37228
21998919cfe9
show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows is no cursor-in-non-selected-windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37222
diff
changeset
|
193 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the |
36821 | 194 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if |
36885 | 195 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. |
36821 | 196 |
197 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
198 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
199 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
200 customizing face `fringe'. | |
201 | |
202 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. | |
203 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. | |
204 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D | |
205 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line | |
206 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of | |
207 the window to be partially obscured.) | |
208 | |
209 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older | |
210 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil, | |
211 and its use is deprecated. | |
212 | |
213 +++ | |
214 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
215 | |
36848
87bf5cef20c7
Mode line is mouse-sensitive on all systems which have a mouse.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36821
diff
changeset
|
216 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all |
87bf5cef20c7
Mode line is mouse-sensitive on all systems which have a mouse.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36821
diff
changeset
|
217 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a |
87bf5cef20c7
Mode line is mouse-sensitive on all systems which have a mouse.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36821
diff
changeset
|
218 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the |
87bf5cef20c7
Mode line is mouse-sensitive on all systems which have a mouse.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36821
diff
changeset
|
219 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is |
87bf5cef20c7
Mode line is mouse-sensitive on all systems which have a mouse.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36821
diff
changeset
|
220 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you |
87bf5cef20c7
Mode line is mouse-sensitive on all systems which have a mouse.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36821
diff
changeset
|
221 have enabled one. |
36821 | 222 |
223 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
224 | |
225 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
226 buffers. | |
227 | |
228 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
229 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
230 | |
231 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
232 | |
233 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or | |
234 `*') toggles the status. | |
235 | |
236 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. | |
237 | |
238 +++ | |
239 ** Hourglass pointer | |
240 | |
241 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can | |
242 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
243 | |
244 +++ | |
245 ** Blinking cursor | |
246 | |
247 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
248 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
249 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
250 the group `cursor'. | |
251 | |
252 +++ | |
253 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
254 | |
255 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
256 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
257 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
258 details. | |
259 | |
260 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
261 have to do anything to activate it. | |
262 | |
263 +++ | |
264 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been | |
265 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a | |
266 buffer by default. | |
267 | |
268 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the | |
269 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the | |
270 beginning and end of the buffer. | |
271 | |
272 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the | |
273 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is | |
274 signaled. | |
275 | |
276 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init | |
277 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. | |
278 | |
279 +++ | |
280 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't | |
281 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
282 this behavior. | |
283 | |
284 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte | |
285 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let | |
286 Emacs dump core. | |
287 | |
288 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
289 | |
290 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
291 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
292 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
293 | |
294 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is | |
295 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is | |
296 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. | |
297 | |
298 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set | |
299 using that menu. | |
300 | |
301 +++ | |
302 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
303 | |
304 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
305 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
306 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
307 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
308 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
309 whitespace. | |
310 | |
311 +++ | |
312 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes | |
313 all frames except the selected one. | |
314 | |
315 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to | |
316 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. | |
317 | |
318 +++ | |
319 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the | |
320 MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
321 | |
322 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs | |
323 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), | |
324 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. | |
325 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option | |
326 `Info-use-header-line'. | |
327 | |
328 +++ | |
329 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor | |
330 mode `iswitchb-mode'. | |
331 | |
332 +++ | |
333 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. | |
334 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with | |
335 `(msb-mode 1)'. | |
336 | |
337 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card | |
338 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', | |
339 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. | |
340 | |
341 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. | |
342 | |
343 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is | |
344 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in | |
345 `fr-drdref.tex'. | |
346 | |
347 +++ | |
348 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not | |
349 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the | |
350 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode | |
351 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. | |
352 | |
353 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains | |
354 a version-dependent component. | |
355 | |
37230
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
356 ** The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
357 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys. |
36821 | 358 |
359 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen | |
360 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace | |
361 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the | |
362 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to | |
37230
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
363 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
364 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
365 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
366 set to nil, and these keys delete backward. |
36821 | 367 |
368 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes | |
369 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the | |
370 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via | |
371 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on | |
37230
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
372 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
373 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
374 |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
375 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode |
343f5ea2a31c
Rename delete-key-deletes-forward.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37228
diff
changeset
|
376 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys. |
36821 | 377 |
378 +++ | |
379 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at | |
380 point in a pop-up window. | |
381 | |
382 +++ | |
383 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) | |
384 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or | |
385 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. | |
386 | |
387 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' | |
388 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. | |
389 | |
390 +++ | |
391 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a | |
392 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
393 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) | |
37365
cf22cb863f75
Fix a typo in auto-save-list-file-prefix.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37289
diff
changeset
|
394 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location. |
36821 | 395 |
396 +++ | |
397 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. | |
398 | |
399 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have | |
400 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
401 | |
36350
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
402 +++ |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
403 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
404 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
405 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
406 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
407 |
35578 | 408 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom |
409 group. | |
410 | |
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
411 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the |
36797
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
412 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values |
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
413 are recognized: |
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
414 |
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
415 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; |
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
416 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; |
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
417 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; |
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
418 nil -- just delete one character. |
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
419 |
36798
434462b4d49e
Mention default value of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36797
diff
changeset
|
420 Default value is `untabify'. |
434462b4d49e
Mention default value of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36797
diff
changeset
|
421 |
36797
e29f21f7e119
Extend description of backward-delete-char-untabify-method.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36788
diff
changeset
|
422 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] |
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
423 |
35064 | 424 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face |
425 symbol, not double-quoted. | |
426 | |
34671 | 427 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future |
35064 | 428 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, |
429 rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to | |
430 lisp/obsolete. | |
34671 | 431 |
34103 | 432 +++ |
34692 | 433 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding |
434 system for keyboard input. | |
435 | |
436 +++ | |
34271 | 437 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
438 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
439 | |
440 +++ | |
34125
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
441 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
442 as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
443 with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
444 example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
445 middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
446 |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
447 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
33990 | 448 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
449 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
450 |
33559 | 451 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
35937 | 452 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
453 non-nil. | |
33559 | 454 |
32511
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
455 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. |
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
456 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the |
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
457 `auto-compression-mode' command. |
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
458 |
32303 | 459 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for |
37805 | 460 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and |
461 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser. | |
32303 | 462 |
37376
223ae6783150
browse-url-new-window-p -> browse-url-new-window-flag.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37375
diff
changeset
|
463 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to |
223ae6783150
browse-url-new-window-p -> browse-url-new-window-flag.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37375
diff
changeset
|
464 `browse-url-new-window-flag'. |
223ae6783150
browse-url-new-window-p -> browse-url-new-window-flag.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37375
diff
changeset
|
465 |
32281 | 466 +++ |
32037 | 467 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
468 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. | |
469 | |
32314 | 470 +++ |
31894 | 471 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
472 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. | |
473 | |
474 +++ | |
31742 | 475 ** Gnus changes. |
476 | |
477 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in | |
478 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, | |
479 internationalization and mail-fetching. | |
480 | |
481 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the | |
482 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. | |
483 | |
484 If you used procmail like in | |
485 | |
486 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t) | |
487 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) | |
488 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") | |
489 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") | |
490 | |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
491 this now has changed to |
31742 | 492 |
493 (setq mail-sources | |
494 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" | |
495 :suffix ".in"))) | |
496 | |
497 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> | |
498 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources | |
499 | |
500 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of | |
501 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. | |
34334 | 502 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no |
503 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. | |
504 | |
34461 | 505 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
506 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was | |
507 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. | |
31742 | 508 |
32182 | 509 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
33364 | 510 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There |
511 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is | |
512 now just a compatibility layer. | |
31742 | 513 |
514 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be | |
515 called to position point. | |
516 | |
517 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in | |
518 summary buffers and NOV files. | |
519 | |
520 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number | |
521 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. | |
522 | |
523 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a | |
524 subtly different manner. | |
525 | |
526 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive | |
527 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with | |
528 ever-changing layouts. | |
529 | |
530 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. | |
531 | |
33627 | 532 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
31742 | 533 |
36039 | 534 +++ |
31742 | 535 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
31741 | 536 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display |
537 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of | |
538 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a | |
539 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this | |
540 on. | |
541 | |
31728 | 542 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
543 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a | |
544 file that is already visited under a different name. | |
545 | |
31807 | 546 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
547 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. | |
548 | |
31728 | 549 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM |
31641 | 550 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, |
551 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the | |
552 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands | |
553 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a | |
554 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. | |
555 | |
31248 | 556 +++ |
31728 | 557 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
32280 | 558 and displays information about that. |
31248 | 559 |
30693 | 560 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
561 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. | |
562 | |
563 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to | |
564 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a | |
565 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be | |
566 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the | |
567 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode | |
568 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. | |
569 | |
29532
9609bc6529ac
executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29509
diff
changeset
|
570 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
31007 | 571 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
29532
9609bc6529ac
executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29509
diff
changeset
|
572 |
31022
2fa78512b45e
Mark the operation of chosing safe coding system as explained
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31020
diff
changeset
|
573 +++ |
29509 | 574 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
575 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer | |
576 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or | |
577 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and | |
578 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, | |
579 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. | |
580 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. | |
581 | |
31020
2f1815d3e9ae
Mark inhibit-iso-escape-detection as updated in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31019
diff
changeset
|
582 +++ |
30296 | 583 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
584 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's | |
585 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores | |
586 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is | |
587 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you | |
30357 | 588 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
30296 | 589 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
30357 | 590 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
591 RET C-x C-f filename RET. | |
30205 | 592 |
29506 | 593 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
594 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. | |
595 | |
31007 | 596 +++ |
29506 | 597 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
598 displays all characters in that character set. | |
599 | |
600 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based | |
601 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. | |
602 | |
31026
3cd6db455d11
Mark comment-dwim as described in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31024
diff
changeset
|
603 +++ |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
604 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
31026
3cd6db455d11
Mark comment-dwim as described in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31024
diff
changeset
|
605 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
606 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
607 commenting with the variable `comment-style'. |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
608 |
31007 | 609 +++ |
28799 | 610 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
611 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
612 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
613 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
614 | |
31007 | 615 +++ |
28695 | 616 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
617 on the display using several methods | |
618 | |
31007 | 619 +++ |
28695 | 620 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be |
621 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
622 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
623 | |
31007 | 624 +++ |
28695 | 625 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is |
33838 | 626 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
28695 | 627 |
28870 | 628 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
28695 | 629 |
630 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
631 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
632 | |
31007 | 633 +++ |
29752 | 634 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
28660 | 635 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
29752 | 636 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
28660 | 637 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
28626 | 638 |
31007 | 639 +++ |
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
640 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
28757 | 641 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
642 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
643 |
28396 | 644 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
645 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
646 | |
31028
b72824a73f3c
Mark load-dangerous-libraries as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31026
diff
changeset
|
647 +++ |
28159 | 648 ** New X resources recognized |
27994 | 649 |
28140 | 650 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
651 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
652 is useful for debugging X problems. | |
653 | |
654 Example: | |
655 | |
28159 | 656 emacs.synchronous: true |
28140 | 657 |
27994 | 658 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
659 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
27995 | 660 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
661 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
662 visual class names are | |
27994 | 663 |
664 TrueColor | |
665 PseudoColor | |
666 DirectColor | |
667 StaticColor | |
668 GrayScale | |
669 StaticGray | |
670 | |
671 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
672 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
673 meaning. | |
674 | |
27995 | 675 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
676 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
677 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
678 visual. | |
679 | |
680 Example: | |
681 | |
28159 | 682 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
27994 | 683 |
684 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
685 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
686 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
687 resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
688 | |
27995 | 689 Example: |
690 | |
28159 | 691 emacs.privateColormap: true |
27995 | 692 |
31007 | 693 +++ |
27770 | 694 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
695 | |
27369 | 696 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
697 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
698 | |
27356 | 699 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
30482
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
700 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and |
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
701 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus |
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
702 displayed by Emacs now have help strings. |
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
703 |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
704 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
705 read mail from the menu etc. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
706 |
31030
5f19633e9dc2
Mark hexl-insert-hex-string as documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31028
diff
changeset
|
707 +++ |
28658 | 708 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
709 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
710 | |
28626 | 711 ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
712 | |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
713 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
28626 | 714 macros |
715 | |
716 Key binding Macro | |
717 ------------------------- | |
718 C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
719 C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
33862
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
720 C-c C-c u @uref |
28626 | 721 C-c C-c q @quotation |
33862
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
722 C-c C-c m @email |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
723 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
724 M-RET @item |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
725 |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
726 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. |
28626 | 727 |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
728 ** Changes in Outline mode. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
729 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
730 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
731 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
732 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
733 |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
734 ** Changes to Emacs Server |
31009 | 735 |
31032
16697e53a439
Mark server-kill-new-buffers as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31030
diff
changeset
|
736 +++ |
16697e53a439
Mark server-kill-new-buffers as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31030
diff
changeset
|
737 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do |
31009 | 738 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers |
739 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with | |
740 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which | |
741 buffers to kill, as before. | |
742 | |
743 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, | |
31032
16697e53a439
Mark server-kill-new-buffers as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31030
diff
changeset
|
744 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in |
31009 | 745 this way. |
746 | |
30788 | 747 ** Changes to Show Paren mode. |
748 | |
749 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. | |
750 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to | |
751 use. Default is 1000. | |
752 | |
31034
6e746a746c96
Mark check-parens as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31032
diff
changeset
|
753 +++ |
27200 | 754 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
755 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
756 | |
31007 | 757 +++ |
758 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either | |
759 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. | |
760 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special | |
761 buffers. | |
762 | |
26417 | 763 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
764 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
765 `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
766 | |
25853 | 767 ** Faces and frame parameters. |
768 | |
769 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
770 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
771 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
772 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
773 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
774 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
775 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
776 | |
777 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
778 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
26264 | 779 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
25853 | 780 `default' face and vice versa. |
781 | |
31036
b8536256a5e8
Mark the `menu' face as already documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31034
diff
changeset
|
782 +++ |
25951 | 783 ** New face `menu'. |
784 | |
785 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
786 | |
31007 | 787 +++ |
25853 | 788 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
789 | |
790 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
791 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
792 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
793 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
794 | |
795 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
796 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
797 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
798 | |
799 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
800 `ScreenGamma'. | |
801 | |
802 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
803 | |
804 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
805 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
806 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
807 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
808 | |
809 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
810 | |
31007 | 811 +++ |
25853 | 812 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". |
813 | |
814 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
815 | |
28677
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
816 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
817 LessTif/Motif one. |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
818 |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
819 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
820 LessTif and Motif. |
25853 | 821 |
822 ** Sound support | |
823 | |
30012 | 824 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware |
30121
f67697912c81
Correct a typo ("aka as" -> "a.k.a.").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30111
diff
changeset
|
825 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently |
30012 | 826 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). |
25853 | 827 |
31007 | 828 +++ |
25853 | 829 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
830 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
831 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
832 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
833 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
834 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
835 | |
836 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
837 | |
31045
a82ae0d01b33
Mark x-stretch-cursor as being documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31042
diff
changeset
|
838 +++ |
25853 | 839 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
840 | |
841 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
842 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
843 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
844 | |
31047
0a8115d19f8e
Mark indicate-empty-lines as being documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31045
diff
changeset
|
845 +++ |
25853 | 846 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a |
847 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
848 | |
849 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
850 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
851 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
852 | |
31127
acdb063c2011
Mark scroll-*-aggressively as being documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31124
diff
changeset
|
853 +++ |
25853 | 854 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. |
855 | |
856 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
33624 | 857 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
25853 | 858 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
31124 | 859 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
25853 | 860 |
861 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
35680 | 862 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
25853 | 863 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
31124 | 864 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
25853 | 865 |
866 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
867 notably at the end of lines. | |
868 | |
869 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
870 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
871 | |
31007 | 872 +++ |
37446
1b121f2746a8
Change entries for string-rectangle and alike.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37388
diff
changeset
|
873 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'. |
1b121f2746a8
Change entries for string-rectangle and alike.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37388
diff
changeset
|
874 |
1b121f2746a8
Change entries for string-rectangle and alike.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37388
diff
changeset
|
875 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle', |
1b121f2746a8
Change entries for string-rectangle and alike.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37388
diff
changeset
|
876 but inserts text instead of replacing it. |
35640
6ed788afc91f
Document the incompatible change in string-rectangle.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35578
diff
changeset
|
877 |
25853 | 878 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
879 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
880 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
881 | |
31049
c5e2705a7119
Mark the `e' command in query-replace as being documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31047
diff
changeset
|
882 +++ |
29972 | 883 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
884 you edit the replacement string. | |
28805 | 885 |
31007 | 886 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets |
28805 | 887 you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to |
888 lisp-complete-symbol. | |
889 | |
30111 | 890 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. |
891 | |
27017 | 892 ** Changes to hideshow.el |
893 | |
894 *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
895 | |
36039 | 896 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
897 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp | |
898 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. | |
899 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. | |
900 | |
901 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, | |
902 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can | |
903 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of | |
904 the open block. | |
905 | |
906 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a | |
907 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of | |
908 the normal block-hiding function. | |
909 | |
910 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. | |
911 | |
912 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, | |
36788
c005d537d3cc
*** empty log message ***
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
36734
diff
changeset
|
913 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix |
c005d537d3cc
*** empty log message ***
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
36734
diff
changeset
|
914 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation |
c005d537d3cc
*** empty log message ***
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
36734
diff
changeset
|
915 for `hs-minor-mode'. |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
916 |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
917 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
918 |
31007 | 919 +++ |
31816 | 920 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
921 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
922 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
923 |
31007 | 924 +++ |
31816 | 925 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
926 current buffer. | |
927 | |
928 +++ | |
929 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries | |
930 in a log file. | |
931 | |
932 +++ | |
933 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log | |
934 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. | |
36885 | 935 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's |
31007 | 936 version number is performed based on regular expressions from |
35680 | 937 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. |
31007 | 938 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. |
27005
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
939 |
32741
5f74213c8d48
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32661
diff
changeset
|
940 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. |
31816 | 941 |
32661
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
942 ** Changes to cmuscheme |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
943 |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
944 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
945 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
946 |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
947 ** Changes in Font Lock |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
948 |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
949 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
950 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
951 |
35680 | 952 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should |
35420 | 953 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. |
32741
5f74213c8d48
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32661
diff
changeset
|
954 |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
955 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
956 the face used for each string/comment. |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
957 |
33913
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
958 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
959 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
960 |
26606 | 961 ** Comint (subshell) changes |
962 | |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
963 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
964 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
965 |
37388 | 966 *** Comint now by default removes CRs from CR LF sequences. Comint |
967 now treats single CRs in the output in a way similar to a terminal, by | |
968 deleting everything to the beginning of the line. This is achieved by | |
969 adding `comint-cr-magic' to `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' by | |
970 default. | |
971 | |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
972 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
973 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
974 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
975 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
976 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
977 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
978 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
979 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
980 |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
981 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes |
26606 | 982 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. |
983 | |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
984 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and |
26606 | 985 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current |
986 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
987 | |
988 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
989 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
990 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
991 | |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
992 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
993 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
994 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
995 |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
996 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') |
32636
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
997 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
998 argument, it appends to the file. |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
999 |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
1000 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' |
32636
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
1001 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
1002 compatibility. |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
1003 |
33139 | 1004 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input |
1005 ring (history). | |
32636
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
1006 |
34979 | 1007 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for |
34983 | 1008 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp |
1009 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". | |
34979 | 1010 |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
1011 ** Changes to Rmail mode |
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
1012 |
34060 | 1013 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
1014 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when |
28492 | 1015 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the |
1016 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
1017 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
1018 as correspondent. | |
1019 | |
1020 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
1021 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
29162 | 1022 regexp matching your mail addresses. |
28492 | 1023 |
28292 | 1024 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
1025 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
1026 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
1027 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
1028 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
1029 | |
27361 | 1030 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
1031 like `j'. | |
1032 | |
27381
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
1033 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
1034 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
27378
af3075bcc264
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27369
diff
changeset
|
1035 digest message. |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
1036 |
29162 | 1037 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies |
1038 in which folder to put messages automatically. | |
1039 | |
35470
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1040 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message |
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1041 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly |
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1042 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. |
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1043 |
26271 | 1044 ** Changes to TeX mode |
1045 | |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1046 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to |
26271 | 1047 `latex-mode'. |
1048 | |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1049 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1050 |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1051 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1052 |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1053 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode. |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
1054 |
25853 | 1055 ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
1056 | |
1057 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
1058 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
1059 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
1060 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
1061 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
1062 can be edited from that buffer. | |
1063 | |
1064 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
1065 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
1066 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
1067 | |
1068 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
1069 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
1070 | |
1071 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
1072 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
1073 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
1074 been cited. | |
1075 | |
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1076 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1077 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1078 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1079 in column 1 are always made leaves. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1080 |
25853 | 1081 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
1082 has the following new features: | |
1083 | |
1084 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
1085 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
1086 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
1087 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
1088 | |
1089 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
1090 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
1091 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
1092 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
1093 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
1094 defaults to 1. | |
1095 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1096 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in |
29676 | 1097 file names. |
1098 | |
31007 | 1099 +++ |
25853 | 1100 ** Customize changes |
1101 | |
1102 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
36885 | 1103 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to |
1104 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that | |
1105 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in | |
1106 earlier versions of Emacs. | |
25853 | 1107 |
1108 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
1109 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
1110 default). | |
1111 | |
1112 ** New features in evaluation commands | |
1113 | |
30056 | 1114 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
25853 | 1115 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
1116 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
1117 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
1118 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
1119 | |
30056 | 1120 *** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
1121 code when called with a prefix argument. | |
1122 | |
30564 | 1123 ** Ispell changes |
1124 | |
31061
457c0b39a922
Mark `ispell' and the DOZe'NT support as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31058
diff
changeset
|
1125 +++ |
30568
904cda56fa16
Fix typos in the entry for `ispell' command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30565
diff
changeset
|
1126 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
904cda56fa16
Fix typos in the entry for `ispell' command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30565
diff
changeset
|
1127 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it |
30564 | 1128 spell-checks the current buffer. |
1129 | |
31061
457c0b39a922
Mark `ispell' and the DOZe'NT support as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31058
diff
changeset
|
1130 +++ |
30937 | 1131 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
1132 added. | |
1133 | |
1134 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling | |
1135 correction is made and re-checked. | |
1136 | |
36821 | 1137 *** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added. |
30937 | 1138 |
1139 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some | |
1140 cases. | |
1141 | |
1142 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict | |
1143 on syntax errors. | |
1144 | |
1145 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the | |
1146 end of the buffer. | |
1147 | |
25853 | 1148 ** Dired changes |
1149 | |
1150 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
1151 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
1152 is, delete only empty directories. | |
1153 | |
1154 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
1155 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
1156 copy directories recursively. | |
1157 | |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1158 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1159 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1160 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1161 |
30111 | 1162 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
1163 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or | |
1164 directory. | |
1165 | |
30278
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1166 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1167 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1168 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1169 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1170 accurate or inaccurate as it is. |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1171 |
30415 | 1172 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' |
1173 from ls switches. | |
1174 | |
33291
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1175 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1176 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1177 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1178 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1179 |
25853 | 1180 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
1181 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
1182 | |
26820 | 1183 ** CC mode changes. |
1184 | |
1185 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
1186 current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
1187 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
1188 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
1189 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
1190 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
1191 release. | |
1192 | |
37009 | 1193 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. |
1194 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode | |
1195 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much | |
1196 confusion. | |
1197 | |
1198 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the | |
1199 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for | |
1200 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't | |
1201 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. | |
1202 | |
1203 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. | |
1204 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: | |
1205 | |
1206 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening | |
1207 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". | |
1208 | |
1209 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening | |
1210 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. | |
1211 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the | |
1212 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". | |
1213 | |
1214 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. | |
1215 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made | |
1216 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an | |
1217 earlier statement. An example: | |
1218 | |
1219 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) | |
1220 if (a[i]) | |
1221 res += a[i]->offset; | |
1222 else | |
1223 | |
1224 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it | |
1225 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after | |
1226 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's | |
1227 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of | |
1228 the preceding "if". | |
1229 | |
1230 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on | |
1231 by default. | |
1232 | |
1233 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. | |
1234 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which | |
1235 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing | |
1236 documentation or other natural language text. | |
1237 | |
1238 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that | |
1239 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in | |
1240 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline | |
1241 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed | |
1242 to other strings that typically contain format specifications, | |
1243 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses | |
1244 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. | |
1245 | |
1246 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. | |
1247 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the | |
1248 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in | |
1249 comment prefixes and paragraph starts. | |
1250 | |
1251 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. | |
1252 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment | |
1253 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This | |
1254 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in | |
1255 Pike mode only. | |
1256 | |
1257 *** Better handling of syntactic errors. | |
1258 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been | |
1259 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message | |
1260 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the | |
1261 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no | |
1262 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while | |
1263 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error | |
1264 is reported afterwards. | |
1265 | |
1266 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. | |
1267 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by | |
1268 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. | |
1269 | |
1270 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. | |
1271 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending | |
1272 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now | |
1273 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some | |
1274 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the | |
1275 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the | |
1276 groundwork. | |
1277 | |
30412 | 1278 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
1279 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior | |
1280 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for | |
1281 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might | |
1282 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't | |
1283 have to bother. | |
1284 | |
1285 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing | |
1286 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally | |
30445 | 1287 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
30412 | 1288 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
1289 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" | |
1290 by default) to override the global settings made by the user. | |
1291 | |
26820 | 1292 *** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
1293 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
1294 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
1295 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
1296 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
1297 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
1298 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
1299 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
1300 | |
1301 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
1302 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
1303 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
1304 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
1305 above. | |
1306 | |
1307 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
1308 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
1309 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
1310 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
1311 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
1312 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
1313 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
1314 function documentation for more info. | |
1315 | |
1316 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
1317 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
1318 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
1319 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
1320 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
1321 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
1322 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
1323 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
1324 | |
1325 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
1326 | |
1327 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
1328 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
1329 | |
1330 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
1331 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
1332 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
1333 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
1334 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
1335 style system. | |
1336 | |
1337 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
1338 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
1339 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
1340 as far as possible. | |
1341 | |
1342 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
1343 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
1344 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
1345 chapter about this in the manual. | |
1346 | |
1347 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
1348 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
1349 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
1350 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
1351 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
1352 | |
1353 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
1354 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
1355 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
1356 | |
1357 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
1358 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
1359 | |
1360 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
1361 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
1362 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
1363 inside CC Mode. | |
1364 | |
1365 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
1366 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
1367 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
1368 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
1369 cc-mode/). | |
1370 | |
1371 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
1372 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
1373 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
1374 literals. | |
1375 | |
1376 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
1377 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
1378 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
1379 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
1380 this function. | |
1381 | |
1382 *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
1383 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
1384 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
1385 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
1386 Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
1387 | |
1388 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
1389 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
1390 opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
1391 | |
1392 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
1393 | |
1394 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
1395 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
1396 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
1397 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
1398 | |
1399 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
1400 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
1401 the column specified by comment-column. | |
1402 | |
1403 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
1404 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
1405 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
1406 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
1407 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
1408 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
1409 | |
1410 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
1411 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
1412 arguments. | |
1413 | |
1414 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
1415 | |
1416 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
1417 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
1418 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
1419 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
1420 Provan). | |
1421 | |
1422 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
1423 | |
28506 | 1424 ** Makefile mode changes |
1425 | |
1426 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
1427 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1428 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
28506 | 1429 Fontlock mode is active. |
1430 | |
26407 | 1431 ** Isearch changes |
1432 | |
30477 | 1433 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
1434 so that searches can be resumed. | |
1435 | |
1436 *** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, | |
28506 | 1437 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
1438 that started the search. | |
1439 | |
26407 | 1440 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
25853 | 1441 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
1442 | |
31063
e0e59380736b
Mark isearch-lazy-highlight as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31061
diff
changeset
|
1443 +++ |
26407 | 1444 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
1445 | |
26417 | 1446 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
26407 | 1447 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
1448 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
1449 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
1450 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1451 `secondary-selection'. |
26407 | 1452 |
1453 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
1454 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
1455 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
1456 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
1457 usual snappy response. | |
1458 | |
1459 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
1460 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
1461 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
1462 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
1463 | |
31064
3aa8be9f2e70
Mark sort-numeric-fields and sort-numeric-base as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31063
diff
changeset
|
1464 +++ |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1465 ** Changes in sort.el |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1466 |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1467 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
27533
6dfbe5197843
A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27498
diff
changeset
|
1468 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
31064
3aa8be9f2e70
Mark sort-numeric-fields and sort-numeric-base as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31063
diff
changeset
|
1469 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1470 numeric base. |
26407 | 1471 |
28194 | 1472 ** Changes to Ange-ftp |
1473 | |
31007 | 1474 +++ |
28194 | 1475 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
25929 | 1476 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
1477 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
1478 | |
28194 | 1479 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
1480 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
1481 | |
30518
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
1482 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which |
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
1483 output ^M at the end of lines. |
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
1484 |
25984 | 1485 ** Shell script mode changes. |
1486 | |
1487 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
35680 | 1488 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and |
25984 | 1489 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. |
1490 | |
26264 | 1491 ** Etags changes. |
1492 | |
1493 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
1494 | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1495 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1496 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1497 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1498 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1499 a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1500 |
26264 | 1501 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
1502 declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
1503 | |
1504 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1505 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
26264 | 1506 |
35665
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1507 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags |
36407
bd93619c67d4
Mention that etags switches to C++ when meets `template'.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36350
diff
changeset
|
1508 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or |
bd93619c67d4
Mention that etags switches to C++ when meets `template'.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36350
diff
changeset
|
1509 `template' keywords. |
35665
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1510 |
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1511 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in |
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1512 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. |
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1513 |
26264 | 1514 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and |
1515 types. | |
1516 | |
29238 | 1517 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. |
26264 | 1518 |
1519 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
1520 | |
1521 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
1522 are now tagged. | |
1523 | |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
1524 *** In makefiles, tags the targets. |
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
1525 |
26264 | 1526 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local |
1527 variables are tagged. | |
1528 | |
1529 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
1530 | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1531 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1532 for PSWrap. |
26264 | 1533 |
31066
8339f8e5c8c8
Mark etags.el changes as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31064
diff
changeset
|
1534 +++ |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1535 ** Changes in etags.el |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1536 |
28244 | 1537 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
1538 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
1539 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
1540 | |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1541 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1542 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1543 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1544 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1545 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1546 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1547 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1548 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1549 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1550 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1551 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1552 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1553 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1554 A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1555 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1556 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1557 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1558 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1559 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1560 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1561 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1562 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1563 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1564 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1565 |
34191 | 1566 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. |
1567 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c | |
1568 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", | |
36734
78751f7bca48
etags.el: compressed files are now transparently supported
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36537
diff
changeset
|
1569 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, |
34191 | 1570 point will go to the beginning of the file. |
1571 | |
36821 | 1572 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if |
36734
78751f7bca48
etags.el: compressed files are now transparently supported
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36537
diff
changeset
|
1573 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search |
78751f7bca48
etags.el: compressed files are now transparently supported
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36537
diff
changeset
|
1574 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. |
78751f7bca48
etags.el: compressed files are now transparently supported
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36537
diff
changeset
|
1575 |
36821 | 1576 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point |
1577 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is | |
1578 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. | |
1579 | |
31007 | 1580 +++ |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1581 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1582 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1583 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1584 |
31068
38395be86e6d
Mark the new language environments as documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31066
diff
changeset
|
1585 +++ |
29506 | 1586 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
1587 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets | |
1588 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). | |
36039 | 1589 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have |
1590 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. | |
36470 | 1591 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) |
1592 and Polish `slash'. | |
26016 | 1593 |
31007 | 1594 +++ |
35162 | 1595 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
1596 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations |
35162 | 1597 of the tutorial. |
1598 | |
36428 | 1599 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for |
1600 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs | |
1601 Lisp Coding Convention". | |
1602 | |
1603 new command old-binding | |
1604 --- ------- ----------- | |
1605 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 | |
1606 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 | |
1607 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 | |
1608 | |
1609 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged | |
1610 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged | |
1611 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged | |
1612 | |
1613 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 | |
1614 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 | |
1615 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 | |
1616 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 | |
1617 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged | |
1618 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 | |
1619 | |
36917 | 1620 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the |
36916 | 1621 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus |
1622 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating | |
1623 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input | |
1624 "`", you must type "=q". | |
1625 | |
35162 | 1626 +++ |
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
1627 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
26652 | 1628 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now |
1629 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
1630 | |
1631 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
1632 | |
31007 | 1633 +++ |
26768 | 1634 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
1635 | |
31070
5c579e72175d
Mark dabbrev-ignore-regexps as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31068
diff
changeset
|
1636 +++ |
35937 | 1637 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
28492 | 1638 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular |
1639 expression from that list, are not checked. | |
1640 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1641 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1642 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1643 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1644 the buffer, just like for the local files. |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1645 |
30829 | 1646 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. |
1647 | |
31279
90089bb22edf
Mark as documented in the manual the effect of prefix argument
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31248
diff
changeset
|
1648 +++ |
31231 | 1649 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
1650 displays local abbrevs, only. | |
1651 | |
31388 | 1652 ** VC Changes |
1653 | |
1654 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it | |
1655 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp | |
1656 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism | |
1657 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has | |
1658 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1659 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
31388 | 1660 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
1661 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the | |
1662 file is registered in that backend. | |
1663 | |
1664 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed | |
1665 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the | |
1666 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for | |
1667 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then | |
1668 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. | |
1669 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. | |
1670 | |
1671 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC | |
1672 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for | |
1673 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables | |
1674 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS | |
1675 where it doesn't make sense.) | |
1676 | |
1677 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also | |
1678 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude | |
1679 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. | |
1680 | |
1681 *** General Changes | |
1682 | |
1683 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding | |
1684 checks are always done now. | |
1685 | |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
1686 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
31388 | 1687 operations. |
1688 | |
33111
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1689 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1690 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1691 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1692 |
33541 | 1693 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
1694 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the | |
1695 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into | |
1696 the working file (``merge news''). | |
1697 | |
1698 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r | |
1699 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work | |
1700 downwards. | |
1701 | |
1702 *** Multiple Backends | |
1703 | |
1704 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is | |
1705 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS | |
1706 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally | |
1707 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your | |
1708 local RCS archives. | |
1709 | |
1710 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) | |
1711 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' | |
1712 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of | |
1713 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) | |
1714 | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1715 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1716 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1717 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1718 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1719 current revision number from the more remote backend. |
33541 | 1720 |
1721 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to | |
1722 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change | |
1723 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to | |
1724 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. | |
1725 | |
1726 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your | |
1727 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the | |
1728 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry | |
1729 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. | |
1730 | |
31388 | 1731 *** Changes for CVS |
1732 | |
1733 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the | |
1734 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in | |
1735 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined | |
1736 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a | |
1737 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts | |
1738 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC | |
1739 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. | |
1740 | |
33541 | 1741 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
1742 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and | |
1743 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without | |
1744 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version | |
1745 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version | |
1746 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ | |
1747 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter | |
1748 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, | |
1749 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted | |
33862
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
1750 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
1751 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file |
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
1752 name.) |
33541 | 1753 |
31388 | 1754 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
1755 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. | |
1756 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to | |
33541 | 1757 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
31388 | 1758 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
1759 entire directory tree. | |
1760 | |
1761 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call | |
1762 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option | |
1763 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are | |
1764 "watched" by other developers.) | |
1765 | |
33541 | 1766 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
1767 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1768 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
33541 | 1769 starting at the given directory. |
1770 | |
31388 | 1771 *** Lisp Changes in VC |
1772 | |
1773 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now | |
1774 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a | |
1775 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and | |
1776 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1777 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1778 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top |
31388 | 1779 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1780 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1781 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. |
31388 | 1782 |
36525
cb77fd8249b6
Change the `***' for the EDT entry to `**'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36470
diff
changeset
|
1783 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
35163 | 1784 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
1785 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. | |
1786 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. | |
1787 | |
25853 | 1788 ** New modes and packages |
1789 | |
34394
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1790 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1791 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when |
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1792 the default is not applicable. |
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1793 |
33618 | 1794 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
1795 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The | |
1796 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. | |
1797 | |
1798 Features are: | |
1799 | |
1800 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is | |
1801 drawn, like this: | \ / | |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
1802 --+-- X |
33618 | 1803 | / \ |
1804 | |
1805 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the | |
1806 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If | |
1807 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a | |
1808 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will | |
1809 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line | |
1810 you are drawing. | |
1811 | |
1812 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) | |
1813 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. | |
1814 | |
1815 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by | |
1816 flood-filling. | |
1817 | |
1818 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular | |
1819 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be | |
1820 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in | |
1821 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. | |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
1822 |
33618 | 1823 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
1824 also do without the mouse. | |
1825 | |
1826 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to | |
1827 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares | |
1828 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your | |
1829 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, | |
1830 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. | |
1831 | |
1832 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: | |
1833 | |
1834 lines straight-lines | |
1835 rectangles squares | |
1836 poly-lines straight poly-lines | |
1837 ellipses circles | |
1838 text (see-thru) text (overwrite) | |
1839 spray-can setting size for spraying | |
1840 vaporize line vaporize lines | |
1841 erase characters erase rectangles | |
1842 | |
1843 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or | |
1844 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in | |
1845 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while | |
1846 drawing. | |
1847 | |
1848 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines | |
1849 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are | |
1850 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired | |
1851 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. | |
1852 | |
1853 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this | |
1854 can be turned off). | |
1855 | |
31019
2ec8d313faf7
Mark timeclock.el as being described in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31009
diff
changeset
|
1856 +++ |
32448
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1857 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1858 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1859 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1860 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1861 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1862 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1863 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1864 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1865 all within the scope of your Emacs process. |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1866 |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1867 +++ |
30781 | 1868 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
1869 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the | |
1870 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working | |
1871 on certain projects. | |
1872 | |
31071
93f2d24e3942
Mark hi-lock.el as being documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31070
diff
changeset
|
1873 +++ |
35927 | 1874 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
1875 of interactively entered regexps. For example, | |
30789 | 1876 |
1877 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET | |
30565 | 1878 |
1879 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background | |
1880 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are | |
1881 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. | |
1882 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of | |
1883 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the | |
1884 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the | |
35927 | 1885 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
1886 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. | |
30565 | 1887 |
31007 | 1888 +++ |
30789 | 1889 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
30565 | 1890 Emacs is idle. |
1891 | |
30319 | 1892 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
1893 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. | |
1894 | |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1895 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1896 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should |
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1897 be more robust while offering the same functionality. |
33913
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
1898 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
1899 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1900 |
31007 | 1901 +++ |
28879 | 1902 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
1903 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
1904 separate Texinfo file. | |
1905 | |
31007 | 1906 +++ |
1907 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or | |
1908 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) | |
1909 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with | |
1910 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to | |
35680 | 1911 enter check-in log messages. |
31007 | 1912 |
1913 +++ | |
28834 | 1914 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
1915 without invoking external programs. | |
1916 | |
1917 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
1918 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
1919 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
1920 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
28955
6cfd3ddf0911
Correct a typo in description of `woman.el'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28946
diff
changeset
|
1921 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
28834 | 1922 |
1923 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
1924 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
1925 | |
31073
f35042c35352
Mark re-build as being documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31071
diff
changeset
|
1926 +++ |
28098 | 1927 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
1928 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
1929 | |
1930 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
1931 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
1932 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
1933 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
1934 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
1935 single step. | |
1936 | |
1937 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
1938 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
1939 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
1940 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
1941 | |
31007 | 1942 +++ |
27644 | 1943 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
1944 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
1945 actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
1946 | |
27498 | 1947 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
1948 PostScript. | |
1949 | |
1950 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
1951 | |
1952 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
1953 | |
1954 ; comment (until end of line) | |
1955 A non-terminal | |
1956 "C" terminal | |
1957 ?C? special | |
1958 $A default non-terminal | |
1959 $"C" default terminal | |
1960 $?C? default special | |
1961 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
1962 C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
1963 C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
1964 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
1965 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
1966 (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
1967 [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
1968 C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
1969 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
1970 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
1971 {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
1972 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
1973 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
1974 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
1975 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
1976 | |
1977 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
1978 | |
27328 | 1979 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
1980 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
1981 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
1982 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
1983 equal signs of assignments. | |
1984 | |
31007 | 1985 +++ |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1986 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1987 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1988 |
31007 | 1989 +++ |
27016 | 1990 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
1991 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
36885 | 1992 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. |
27016 | 1993 |
29696 | 1994 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
1995 | |
27733 | 1996 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
1997 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
1998 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
1999 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
2000 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
2001 which answers different needs. | |
2002 | |
31007 | 2003 +++ |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
2004 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
2005 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
2006 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
2007 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
2008 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
2009 to be enabled. |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
2010 |
31007 | 2011 +++ |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2012 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2013 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2014 |
31007 | 2015 +++ |
25853 | 2016 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
2017 | |
31007 | 2018 +++ |
25853 | 2019 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. |
2020 | |
2021 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
2022 | |
35578 | 2023 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
31936 | 2024 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
2025 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to | |
2026 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This | |
2027 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground | |
2028 and background colors. | |
2029 | |
25853 | 2030 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
2031 Pascal) language. | |
2032 | |
31156 | 2033 +++ |
25853 | 2034 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on |
2035 the text at point. | |
2036 | |
2037 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
2038 | |
31007 | 2039 +++ |
25862 | 2040 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
2041 | |
35163 | 2042 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
2043 whitespace in a file. | |
25853 | 2044 |
25992 | 2045 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
2046 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
2047 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
2048 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
2049 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
2050 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
2051 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
2052 | |
2053 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
2054 | |
2055 Here is an example of columns: | |
2056 | |
2057 horse apple bus | |
2058 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
2059 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
2060 | |
2061 Doing the following settings: | |
2062 | |
2063 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
2064 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
2065 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
2066 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
2067 | |
2068 | |
2069 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
2070 | |
2071 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
2072 | |
2073 It results: | |
2074 | |
2075 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
2076 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
2077 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
2078 | |
2079 delim-col has the following options: | |
2080 | |
2081 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
2082 before all columns. | |
2083 | |
2084 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
2085 between each column. | |
2086 | |
2087 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
2088 after all columns. | |
2089 | |
2090 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
2091 each column. | |
2092 | |
2093 delim-col has the following commands: | |
2094 | |
2095 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
2096 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
2097 | |
31007 | 2098 +++ |
36885 | 2099 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were |
2100 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a | |
2101 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the | |
2102 recent file list can be displayed: | |
30319 | 2103 |
2104 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. | |
35680 | 2105 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
2106 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory | |
30319 | 2107 |
2108 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to | |
2109 dynamically change the menu appearance. | |
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
2110 |
26149 | 2111 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
2112 text. | |
2113 | |
31007 | 2114 +++ |
26924 | 2115 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
26786 | 2116 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
2117 specific to Message mode. | |
2118 | |
31007 | 2119 +++ |
26924 | 2120 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
2121 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
2122 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
2123 | |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2124 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2125 interface to access directory servers using different directory |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2126 protocols. It has a separate manual. |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2127 |
28132 | 2128 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
2129 for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
2130 | |
31007 | 2131 +++ |
28710 | 2132 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
28855
1be9a502caca
Cleaned some left over bogus conflict markers.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28854
diff
changeset
|
2133 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2134 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
28710 | 2135 minibuffer with completion. |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2136 |
28883 | 2137 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
2138 with the diary features. | |
2139 | |
28912 | 2140 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
2141 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
2142 | |
29814 | 2143 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
2144 Fill mode. | |
2145 | |
32182 | 2146 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
2147 Gnus facilities. | |
2148 | |
33020 | 2149 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
2150 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main | |
2151 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning | |
2152 they can be profiled, debugged, etc. | |
32465 | 2153 |
33290 | 2154 +++ |
2155 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping | |
2156 paragraphs filled as you modify them. | |
2157 | |
2158 +++ | |
2159 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files | |
2160 to be visited as images. | |
2161 | |
25853 | 2162 ** Withdrawn packages |
2163 | |
2164 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
2165 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
26133 | 2166 |
27369 | 2167 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
2168 | |
2169 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
29102 | 2170 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
2171 |
33991 | 2172 * Incompatible Lisp changes |
2173 | |
2174 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and | |
2175 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. | |
35421 | 2176 See the sections below for details. |
33991 | 2177 |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
2178 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
2179 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
35421 | 2180 Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'. |
33991 | 2181 |
2182 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code | |
2183 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) | |
2184 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from | |
2185 these properties are active. | |
2186 | |
34029 | 2187 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
33991 | 2188 ranges may affect some code. |
34017 | 2189 |
2190 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook | |
2191 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might | |
2192 make a difference to some code. | |
2193 | |
34029 | 2194 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
2195 operates on the minibuffer. | |
2196 | |
34087
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2197 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2198 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2199 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2200 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2201 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2202 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2203 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2204 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2205 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2206 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2207 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2208 the buffer as multibyte characters. |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2209 |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2210 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2211 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2212 appropriate for reading truly binary files. |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2213 |
34617 | 2214 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
35242
910222f6a03c
Tell them to use before-change-functions and after-change-functions
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35223
diff
changeset
|
2215 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
910222f6a03c
Tell them to use before-change-functions and after-change-functions
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35223
diff
changeset
|
2216 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. |
34617 | 2217 |
2218 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as | |
2219 long promised. | |
2220 | |
36244 | 2221 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
2222 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new | |
2223 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than | |
2224 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard | |
2225 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes | |
2226 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule | |
36470 | 2227 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
2228 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. | |
36113
1a29f6d22f6e
Mention potential incompatibilities due to new dimension-2 charsets.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36039
diff
changeset
|
2229 |
37077
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2230 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal. |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2231 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2232 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2233 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2234 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2235 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2236 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2237 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2238 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value |
8b914cd4ae0c
Fix the wording about directory-sep-char deprecation.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37064
diff
changeset
|
2239 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed. |
37064
428092eb22d4
Document that directory-sep-char is deprecated.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37061
diff
changeset
|
2240 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
2241 |
29102 | 2242 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
2243 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) | |
2244 | |
37061 | 2245 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the |
2246 interactive form of a function. | |
2247 | |
36885 | 2248 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
2249 between custom options. Example: | |
2250 | |
2251 (defcustom default-input-method nil | |
2252 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). | |
2253 This is the input method activated automatically by the command | |
2254 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." | |
2255 :group 'mule | |
2256 :type '(choice (const nil) string) | |
2257 :set-after '(current-language-environment)) | |
2258 | |
2259 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after | |
2260 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears | |
2261 first in a custom-set-variables statement. | |
2262 | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
2263 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
35125 | 2264 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
2265 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated | |
2266 (signal or normal termination). | |
2267 | |
33373 | 2268 +++ |
35090 | 2269 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements |
2270 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. | |
2271 | |
2272 +++ | |
34271 | 2273 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
2274 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
2275 | |
2276 +++ | |
33373 | 2277 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies |
2278 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. | |
2279 | |
34054 | 2280 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
33364 | 2281 |
34017 | 2282 +++ |
32913 | 2283 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
2284 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame | |
2285 being deleted. | |
2286 | |
34017 | 2287 +++ |
32845
e92097fd9144
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32751
diff
changeset
|
2288 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
e92097fd9144
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32751
diff
changeset
|
2289 |
32259
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2290 +++ |
32466 | 2291 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
32465 | 2292 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
2293 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends | |
2294 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is | |
2295 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's | |
2296 charset. | |
2297 | |
2298 +++ | |
32259
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2299 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in |
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2300 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the |
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2301 message. |
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2302 |
32050
2a3bcf8d9877
Add entries for `auto-image-file-mode' and `with-auto-compression-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32037
diff
changeset
|
2303 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
2a3bcf8d9877
Add entries for `auto-image-file-mode' and `with-auto-compression-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32037
diff
changeset
|
2304 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. |
2a3bcf8d9877
Add entries for `auto-image-file-mode' and `with-auto-compression-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32037
diff
changeset
|
2305 |
34017 | 2306 +++ |
31636 | 2307 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
2308 with the more general `:mask' property. | |
2309 | |
34017 | 2310 +++ |
35364 | 2311 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
31728 | 2312 |
31561 | 2313 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
2314 backslash. | |
2315 | |
31007 | 2316 +++ |
2317 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs | |
2318 is running in batch mode. For example, | |
2319 | |
2320 (message "%s" (read t)) | |
2321 | |
2322 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result | |
2323 to standard output. | |
2324 | |
2325 +++ | |
2326 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', | |
2327 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. | |
2328 | |
30564 | 2329 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
2330 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new | |
2331 frame or window. | |
2332 | |
31156 | 2333 +++ |
30516 | 2334 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
2335 were added | |
2336 | |
2337 - Function: remove ELT SEQ | |
2338 | |
35680 | 2339 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
30516 | 2340 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
2341 | |
2342 - Function: remq ELT LIST | |
2343 | |
35680 | 2344 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
30516 | 2345 comparison is done with `eq'. |
2346 | |
34017 | 2347 +++ |
30516 | 2348 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. |
30511 | 2349 |
30502 | 2350 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
2351 has been changed. | |
2352 | |
31007 | 2353 +++ |
30357 | 2354 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
2355 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may | |
2356 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. | |
2357 | |
34017 | 2358 +++ |
30219 | 2359 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
2360 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. | |
30203 | 2361 |
30158
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2362 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2363 function was declared obsolete. |
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2364 |
34017 | 2365 +++ |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2366 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
30158
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2367 retained as an alias). |
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2368 |
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2369 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2370 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2371 is automatically converted to Emacs' form. |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2372 |
30038 | 2373 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
2374 | |
33620 | 2375 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
2376 | |
2377 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or | |
2378 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use | |
2379 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, | |
2380 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the | |
2381 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t | |
2382 means never include the minibuffer window. | |
30038 | 2383 |
30006 | 2384 ** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows |
2385 | |
2386 - Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT | |
2387 | |
2388 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. | |
2389 | |
2390 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', | |
2391 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as | |
2392 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil | |
2393 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is | |
2394 returned. | |
2395 | |
2396 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even | |
2397 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff | |
2398 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the | |
2399 minibuffer even if it is active. | |
2400 | |
2401 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer | |
2402 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count | |
2403 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame | |
2404 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, | |
2405 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you | |
2406 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. | |
2407 | |
2408 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. | |
2409 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. | |
2410 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. | |
2411 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. | |
2412 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. | |
2413 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. | |
2414 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. | |
2415 | |
30564 | 2416 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
2417 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional | |
2418 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. | |
29657 | 2419 |
29637 | 2420 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
2421 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that | |
30290 | 2422 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
2423 Default value is nil. | |
29637 | 2424 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2425 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
29633 | 2426 meaning no limit. |
2427 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2428 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
29509 | 2429 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
2430 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, | |
2431 | |
34001 | 2432 +++ |
2433 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument | |
2434 list of a primitive. | |
29238 | 2435 |
33111
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2436 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2437 |
34001 | 2438 +++ |
29286 | 2439 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
2440 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. | |
2441 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather | |
2442 than replacing the local map. | |
2443 | |
35250 | 2444 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
2445 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been | |
2446 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' | |
2447 instead. | |
29498 | 2448 |
2449 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. | |
2450 | |
31156 | 2451 +++ |
33111
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2452 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2453 as promised long ago. |
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
2454 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2455 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
37749
1d5371e8a974
Add entry for auto-coding-regexp-alist.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37446
diff
changeset
|
2456 |
1d5371e8a974
Add entry for auto-coding-regexp-alist.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37446
diff
changeset
|
2457 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems |
1d5371e8a974
Add entry for auto-coding-regexp-alist.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37446
diff
changeset
|
2458 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but |
1d5371e8a974
Add entry for auto-coding-regexp-alist.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37446
diff
changeset
|
2459 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names. |
1d5371e8a974
Add entry for auto-coding-regexp-alist.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37446
diff
changeset
|
2460 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
2461 |
25853 | 2462 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
2463 | |
2464 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
2465 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
2466 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
2467 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
2468 | |
36811 | 2469 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. |
2470 | |
30933
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2471 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2472 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2473 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2474 restriction to be restored incorrectly. |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2475 |
29506 | 2476 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
2477 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list | |
36470 | 2478 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
29506 | 2479 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
2480 | |
2481 *** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and | |
2482 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it | |
2483 contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. | |
2484 | |
2485 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is | |
2486 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern | |
2487 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character | |
2488 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if | |
2489 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the | |
2490 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra | |
2491 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset | |
2492 eight-bit-graphic. | |
2493 | |
2494 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. | |
2495 | |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
2496 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
29506 | 2497 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
2498 character set as previously. | |
2499 | |
2500 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. | |
2501 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function | |
2502 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. | |
2503 | |
2504 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic | |
2505 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the | |
2506 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that | |
2507 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. | |
2508 | |
2509 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family | |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
2510 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
29506 | 2511 |
2512 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset | |
2513 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset | |
2514 "fontset-default". | |
2515 | |
2516 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second | |
2517 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. | |
2518 | |
2519 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character | |
2520 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in | |
2521 buffers and strings. | |
2522 | |
2523 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite | |
2524 character' which is an independent character with a unique character | |
2525 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' | |
2526 have been deleted: composite-char-component, | |
2527 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, | |
2528 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. | |
2529 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have | |
2530 also been deleted. | |
2531 | |
2532 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to | |
2533 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable | |
2534 `reference-point-alist' for more detail. | |
2535 | |
2536 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and | |
2537 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a | |
2538 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters | |
2539 may differ between buffer and string text. | |
2540 | |
2541 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, | |
2542 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. | |
2543 | |
2544 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' | |
2545 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. | |
2546 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property | |
2547 `composition' from STRING. | |
2548 | |
2549 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about | |
2550 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. | |
2551 | |
2552 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as | |
2553 obsolete. | |
2554 | |
36039 | 2555 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
2556 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. | |
2557 | |
33290 | 2558 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
35937 | 2559 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
2560 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, | |
2561 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. | |
2562 | |
2563 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. It provides | |
2564 limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For details, please | |
2565 see the documentation string of this coding system. | |
35557 | 2566 |
29506 | 2567 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
35937 | 2568 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
2569 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. | |
2570 | |
2571 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' | |
2572 have been introduced. | |
29506 | 2573 |
2574 +++ | |
2575 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' | |
35937 | 2576 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
36470 | 2577 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
2578 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the | |
2579 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the | |
36885 | 2580 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for |
2581 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string | |
2582 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to | |
2583 their multibyte equivalent. | |
29506 | 2584 |
28883 | 2585 +++ |
28847 | 2586 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
2587 that offset in the file before writing. | |
2588 | |
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2589 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2590 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). |
28724 | 2591 |
28710 | 2592 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
2593 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
2594 from which the command was issued. | |
2595 | |
2596 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
2597 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
2598 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
2599 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
2600 operate on. | |
2601 | |
28658 | 2602 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
2603 to `window-buffer-height'. | |
2604 | |
2605 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
2606 | |
2607 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
2608 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
2609 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
2610 | |
2611 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
2612 respectively. | |
2613 | |
35680 | 2614 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
28658 | 2615 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
2616 | |
2617 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
2618 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
2619 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
2620 | |
2621 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
2622 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
2623 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
2624 is currently displayed in some window. | |
2625 | |
28556 | 2626 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
2627 argument function's results. | |
2628 | |
28496 | 2629 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
2630 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. | |
2631 | |
28492 | 2632 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
31859 | 2633 header in the list of headers passed to it. |
28492 | 2634 |
2635 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
2636 ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
2637 | |
2638 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
28323 | 2639 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
2640 as follows: | |
2641 | |
2642 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
2643 nil don't display a cursor | |
2644 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
2645 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
2646 others display a box cursor. | |
2647 | |
28303 | 2648 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
2649 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
2650 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
2651 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
2652 | |
28194 | 2653 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
28854
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
2654 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
28194 | 2655 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
2656 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
2657 | |
2658 Example: | |
2659 | |
2660 (string-to-syntax "()") | |
2661 => (4 . 41) | |
2662 | |
28166 | 2663 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
2664 other than 10. | |
2665 | |
2666 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
2667 INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
2668 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2669 #b1111 |
28166 | 2670 => 15 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2671 #b-1111 |
28166 | 2672 => -15 |
2673 | |
2674 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
2675 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2676 #o666 |
28166 | 2677 => 438 |
2678 | |
2679 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
2680 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2681 #xbeef |
28166 | 2682 => 48815 |
2683 | |
2684 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
2685 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2686 #2R-111 |
28166 | 2687 => -7 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2688 #25rah |
28166 | 2689 => 267 |
2690 | |
28335 | 2691 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2692 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
28037 | 2693 and isn't a string. |
2694 | |
28335 | 2695 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
2696 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
2697 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
2698 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
2699 | |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2700 +++ |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2701 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2702 |
28149 | 2703 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2704 for a regexp in a string. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2705 |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2706 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2707 `mouse-position-function'. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2708 |
27827 | 2709 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
2710 that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
2711 | |
27820 | 2712 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
2713 Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
2714 | |
27770 | 2715 +++ |
2716 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
2717 returns it. | |
2718 | |
27276 | 2719 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
2720 returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
2721 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2722 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2723 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2724 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2725 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2726 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2727 mode. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2728 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2729 +++ |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2730 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2731 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2732 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2733 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2734 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2735 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2736 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2737 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2738 been performed." |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2739 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2740 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2741 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2742 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2743 then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2744 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2745 +++ |
26737 | 2746 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
2747 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
2748 and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
2749 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2750 +++ |
26467 | 2751 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
2752 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
2753 specified table. | |
2754 | |
2755 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
2756 | |
2757 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
2758 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
2759 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
2760 what BODY returns. |
26467 | 2761 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2762 +++ |
27693
d8bedafef8d5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27644
diff
changeset
|
2763 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
28063
f1b33463506d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28051
diff
changeset
|
2764 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
35680 | 2765 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
33913
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
2766 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
2767 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2768 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2769 +++ |
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
2770 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
2771 removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
2772 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2773 +++ |
26360
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
2774 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
2775 instead of being optional. |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
2776 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2777 +++ |
26277
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
2778 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
2779 modify read-only text. |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
2780 |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2781 ** New functions and variables for locales. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2782 |
36885 | 2783 +++ |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2784 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2785 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2786 time functions like strftime. The new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2787 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2788 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2789 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2790 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2791 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2792 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2793 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2794 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2795 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2796 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2797 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2798 +++ |
26107
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2799 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2800 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2801 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2802 start sequences. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2803 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2804 +++ |
25910
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
2805 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
2806 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
2807 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2808 +++ |
25853 | 2809 ** New function `propertize' |
2810 | |
2811 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
2812 strings with text properties. | |
2813 | |
2814 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
2815 | |
2816 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
2817 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
2818 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
2819 specified value of that property. Example: | |
2820 | |
2821 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
2822 | |
2823 +++ | |
2824 ** push and pop macros. | |
2825 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2826 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2827 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
25853 | 2828 as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
2829 | |
2830 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
2831 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
2832 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
2833 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2834 ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2835 |
27387
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
2836 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
2837 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2838 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2839 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2840 Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2841 using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2842 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2843 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2844 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2845 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2846 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2847 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2848 |
25853 | 2849 +++ |
34166 | 2850 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
2851 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character | |
2852 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period | |
2853 or a sign. | |
25853 | 2854 |
2855 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
2856 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
2857 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
2858 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
2859 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
2860 space, and DEL. | |
2861 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
2862 and DEL. | |
2863 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
2864 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2865 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
2866 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
2867 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2868 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
2869 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
2870 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
2871 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
2872 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
2873 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2874 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
2875 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
2876 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
2877 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
2878 | |
2879 +++ | |
2880 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
2881 | |
2882 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
2883 | |
2884 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
2885 | |
2886 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
2887 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
2888 | |
2889 :test TEST | |
2890 | |
2891 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
2892 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
2893 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
2894 | |
2895 :size SIZE | |
2896 | |
2897 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
2898 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
2899 | |
2900 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
2901 | |
2902 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
2903 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
2904 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
2905 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
2906 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
2907 | |
2908 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
2909 | |
2910 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
2911 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
2912 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
2913 | |
2914 :weakness WEAK | |
2915 | |
30502 | 2916 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
2917 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as | |
2918 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage | |
2919 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere | |
2920 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
25853 | 2921 |
2922 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
2923 | |
2924 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
2925 | |
2926 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
2927 | |
2928 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
2929 | |
2930 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
2931 | |
2932 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
2933 values are shared. | |
2934 | |
2935 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
2936 | |
2937 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
2938 | |
2939 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
2940 | |
2941 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
2942 | |
2943 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
2944 | |
2945 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
2946 | |
2947 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
2948 | |
2949 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
2950 | |
30789 | 2951 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
25853 | 2952 |
2953 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
2954 | |
2955 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
2956 | |
2957 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
2958 | |
2959 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
2960 | |
2961 Clear TABLE. | |
2962 | |
2963 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
2964 | |
2965 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
2966 not found. | |
2967 | |
26264 | 2968 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
25853 | 2969 |
2970 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
2971 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
2972 | |
2973 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
2974 | |
2975 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
2976 | |
2977 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
2978 | |
2979 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
2980 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
2981 | |
2982 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
2983 | |
2984 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
2985 | |
2986 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
2987 | |
2988 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
2989 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
26264 | 2990 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
25853 | 2991 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
2992 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
2993 | |
2994 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
2995 | |
2996 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
2997 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
2998 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
2999 | |
3000 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
3001 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
3002 | |
3003 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
3004 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
3005 | |
3006 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
3007 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
3008 | |
26264 | 3009 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
25853 | 3010 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
3011 | |
3012 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
3013 | |
3014 +++ | |
3015 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
3016 | |
3017 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
3018 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
3019 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
3020 | |
3021 +++ | |
3022 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
3023 | |
3024 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
3025 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
3026 | |
3027 +++ | |
3028 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
3029 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
3030 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
3031 is too short to reach that column. | |
3032 | |
3033 +++ | |
3034 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
3035 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
3036 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
3037 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
3038 | |
3039 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
3040 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
3041 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
3042 | |
3043 +++ | |
3044 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
3045 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
3046 | |
3047 +++ | |
3048 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
3049 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
3050 | |
3051 +++ | |
3052 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
3053 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
3054 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
3055 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
3056 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
3057 | |
3058 +++ | |
3059 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
3060 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
3061 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
3062 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
3063 | |
3064 +++ | |
36885 | 3065 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
3066 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. | |
25853 | 3067 |
3068 +++ | |
3069 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
3070 | |
3071 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
3072 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
3073 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
3074 | |
3075 +++ | |
3076 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
3077 | |
3078 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
3079 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
3080 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
3081 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
3082 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
3083 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
3084 | |
3085 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
3086 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
3087 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
3088 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
3089 | |
3090 +++ | |
3091 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
3092 | |
3093 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
3094 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
3095 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
3096 result string. | |
3097 | |
3098 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
3099 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
3100 | |
3101 Example: | |
3102 | |
3103 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
3104 (s2 "world")) | |
3105 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
3106 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
26034 | 3107 (format s1 s2)) |
25853 | 3108 |
3109 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
3110 | |
3111 +++ | |
3112 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
3113 | |
3114 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
3115 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
3116 argument in it. | |
3117 | |
3118 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
3119 (arg "world")) | |
3120 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
3121 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
3122 (message msg arg)) | |
3123 | |
3124 +++ | |
3125 ** Sound support | |
3126 | |
3127 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
3128 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
3129 | |
3130 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
3131 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
3132 to enable sound support. | |
3133 | |
3134 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
3135 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
3136 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
3137 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
3138 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
3139 | |
3140 The following sound properties are supported: | |
3141 | |
3142 - `:file FILE' | |
3143 | |
3144 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
3145 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
3146 | |
27148 | 3147 - `:data DATA' |
3148 | |
3149 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
3150 may be present, but not both. | |
3151 | |
25853 | 3152 - `:volume VOLUME' |
3153 | |
3154 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
3155 0..1. This property is optional. | |
3156 | |
33991 | 3157 - `:device DEVICE' |
3158 | |
3159 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the | |
3160 sound. The default device is system-dependent. | |
3161 | |
25853 | 3162 Other properties are ignored. |
3163 | |
33991 | 3164 An alternative interface is called as |
3165 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). | |
3166 | |
25853 | 3167 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
26933 | 3168 |
34001 | 3169 +++ |
26933 | 3170 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being |
3171 a keyword symbol. | |
27145
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3172 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3173 ** Changes to garbage collection |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3174 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3175 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3176 of live and free strings. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3177 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3178 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3179 strings that have been consed so far. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3180 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
3181 |
29151 | 3182 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
3183 Lisp Manual | |
3184 | |
33315 | 3185 +++ |
33309 | 3186 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
3187 mini-windows. | |
3188 | |
34001 | 3189 +++ |
34389
779f5314f5fa
Update entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34334
diff
changeset
|
3190 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
779f5314f5fa
Update entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34334
diff
changeset
|
3191 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is |
779f5314f5fa
Update entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34334
diff
changeset
|
3192 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. |
32915
f8e686a581dc
Add entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32913
diff
changeset
|
3193 |
33309 | 3194 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
31220 | 3195 |
30222 | 3196 +++ |
3197 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. | |
29939 | 3198 |
34001 | 3199 +++ |
29939 | 3200 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an |
3201 image. | |
3202 | |
3203 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME | |
3204 | |
3205 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). | |
3206 | |
3207 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes | |
3208 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical | |
3209 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default | |
3210 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. | |
3211 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
3212 | |
34001 | 3213 +++ |
31639 | 3214 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
3215 has a mask bitmap. | |
3216 | |
3217 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME | |
3218 | |
3219 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. | |
3220 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil | |
3221 or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
3222 | |
31156 | 3223 +++ |
29506 | 3224 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
3225 satisfying one of a list of specifications. | |
3226 | |
3227 +++ | |
3228 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now | |
3229 optional. | |
3230 | |
31156 | 3231 +++ |
3232 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see | |
3233 below). | |
29151 | 3234 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
3235 |
25853 | 3236 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
3237 | |
3238 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
3239 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
3240 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
3241 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
3242 | |
28634 | 3243 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
3244 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
3245 | |
3246 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
3247 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
3248 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
3249 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
3250 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
3251 just display it black instead. | |
3252 | |
3253 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
3254 a line like | |
3255 | |
3256 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
3257 | |
3258 in your `.emacs'. | |
3259 | |
25853 | 3260 ** New face implementation. |
3261 | |
3262 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
3263 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
3264 | |
3265 +++ | |
3266 *** New faces. | |
3267 | |
3268 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
3269 | |
3270 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
26264 | 3271 |
25853 | 3272 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
3273 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
26264 | 3274 |
25853 | 3275 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
26264 | 3276 |
25853 | 3277 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
26264 | 3278 |
25853 | 3279 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
26264 | 3280 |
25853 | 3281 6. Foreground color. |
26264 | 3282 |
25853 | 3283 7. Background color. |
3284 | |
3285 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
3286 | |
3287 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
3288 | |
3289 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
3290 | |
3291 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
3292 | |
3293 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
3294 color. | |
3295 | |
3296 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
3297 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
3298 | |
3299 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
3300 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
3301 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
3302 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
35863
534be6e166a6
Yet another bunch of typo fizes from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35862
diff
changeset
|
3303 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
25853 | 3304 attributes mentioned above. |
3305 | |
3306 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
3307 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
3308 created frames. | |
26264 | 3309 |
25853 | 3310 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
3311 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
3312 `fully-specified'. | |
3313 | |
3314 +++ | |
3315 *** Face merging. | |
3316 | |
3317 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
3318 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
3319 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
3320 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
3321 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
3322 results in a fully-specified face. | |
3323 | |
3324 +++ | |
3325 *** Face realization. | |
3326 | |
3327 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
3328 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
3329 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
3330 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
3331 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
3332 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
3333 | |
3334 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
3335 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
3336 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
3337 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
3338 | |
3339 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
3340 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
3341 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
3342 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
3343 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
3344 | |
3345 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
3346 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
3347 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
3348 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
3349 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
3350 Emacs. | |
3351 | |
3352 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
3353 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
3354 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
3355 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
3356 | |
32966 | 3357 +++ |
25853 | 3358 **** Clearing face caches. |
3359 | |
3360 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
3361 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
3362 unused fonts. | |
3363 | |
3364 +++ | |
3365 *** Font selection. | |
26264 | 3366 |
25853 | 3367 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
3368 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
3369 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
3370 | |
3371 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
3372 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
3373 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
3374 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
3375 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
3376 | |
3377 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
3378 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
3379 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
3380 | |
3381 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
3382 | |
3383 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
3384 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
3385 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
3386 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
3387 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
3388 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
3389 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
3390 | |
33373 | 3391 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
3392 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face | |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
3393 doesn't exist. |
34630 | 3394 |
3395 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify | |
35680 | 3396 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
34630 | 3397 registry. |
3398 | |
35680 | 3399 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
34630 | 3400 slightly different. |
3401 | |
3402 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. | |
3403 | |
25853 | 3404 |
3405 +++ | |
3406 **** Scalable fonts | |
3407 | |
3408 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
3409 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
3410 servers. | |
3411 | |
3412 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
26034 | 3413 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
25853 | 3414 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
3415 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
3416 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
3417 that list. Example: | |
3418 | |
3419 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
3420 | |
3421 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
3422 | |
3423 +++ | |
3424 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
3425 | |
3426 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
3427 | |
3428 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
3429 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
3430 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
3431 | |
3432 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
3433 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
3434 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
3435 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
3436 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
3437 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
3438 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
3439 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
3440 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
3441 of the face font sort order. | |
3442 | |
26264 | 3443 - Function: x-font-family-list |
25853 | 3444 |
3445 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
3446 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
3447 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
3448 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
3449 | |
3450 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
3451 | |
3452 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
3453 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
3454 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
3455 | |
3456 +++ | |
3457 *** Setting face attributes. | |
3458 | |
3459 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
3460 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
3461 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
3462 `face-attribute'. | |
3463 | |
3464 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
3465 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
3466 | |
3467 The following attributes are recognized: | |
3468 | |
3469 `:family' | |
3470 | |
3471 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
3472 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
3473 and `?' are allowed. | |
3474 | |
3475 `:width' | |
3476 | |
3477 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
3478 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
3479 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
3480 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
3481 | |
3482 `:height' | |
3483 | |
31183
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3484 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3485 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3486 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3487 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. |
25853 | 3488 |
3489 `:weight' | |
3490 | |
3491 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
3492 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
3493 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
3494 | |
3495 `:slant' | |
3496 | |
3497 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
3498 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
3499 `reverse-oblique'. | |
3500 | |
3501 `:foreground', `:background' | |
3502 | |
3503 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
3504 | |
3505 `:underline' | |
3506 | |
3507 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
3508 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
3509 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
3510 don't underline. | |
3511 | |
3512 `:overline' | |
3513 | |
3514 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
3515 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
3516 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
3517 overline. | |
3518 | |
3519 `:strike-through' | |
3520 | |
3521 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
3522 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
3523 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
3524 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
3525 | |
3526 `:box' | |
3527 | |
3528 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
3529 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
3530 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
3531 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
3532 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
3533 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
3534 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
3535 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
3536 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
3537 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
3538 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
3539 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
3540 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
3541 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
3542 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
3543 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
3544 box. | |
3545 | |
3546 `:inverse-video' | |
3547 | |
3548 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
3549 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
3550 | |
3551 `:stipple' | |
3552 | |
3553 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
3554 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
3555 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
3556 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
3557 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
3558 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
3559 | |
3560 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
3561 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
3562 | |
3563 `:font' | |
3564 | |
3565 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
3566 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
3567 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
3568 versions of Emacs. | |
3569 | |
3570 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
3571 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
3572 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
3573 | |
3574 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
3575 `defface'. | |
3576 | |
31183
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3577 `:inherit' |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3578 |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3579 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3580 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3581 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3582 |
25853 | 3583 *** Face attributes and X resources |
3584 | |
3585 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
3586 from X resources: | |
3587 | |
3588 Face attribute X resource class | |
3589 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3590 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
3591 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
3592 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
3593 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
3594 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
3595 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
3596 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
3597 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
3598 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
3599 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
3600 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
3601 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
3602 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
26264 | 3603 or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
25853 | 3604 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
3605 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
3606 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
3607 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
3608 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
3609 | |
3610 +++ | |
3611 *** Text property `face'. | |
3612 | |
3613 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
3614 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
3615 specification can be | |
3616 | |
3617 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
3618 | |
3619 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
3620 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
3621 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
3622 for face attribute names. | |
3623 | |
3624 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
3625 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
3626 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
3627 | |
3628 +++ | |
3629 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
3630 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3631 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3632 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3633 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
25853 | 3634 default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3635 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
25853 | 3636 used to clear the mapping table. |
3637 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3638 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3639 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3640 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3641 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3642 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3643 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3644 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3645 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3646 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3647 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3648 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3649 modify their color-related behavior. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3650 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3651 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3652 any frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3653 |
27573
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3654 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3655 |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3656 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3657 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3658 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3659 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3660 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3661 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3662 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3663 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3664 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3665 |
25853 | 3666 +++ |
3667 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3668 |
25853 | 3669 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
33693
efa325b58d74
Mention that `minibuffer-prompt-properties' can be used to disallow
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33627
diff
changeset
|
3670 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
efa325b58d74
Mention that `minibuffer-prompt-properties' can be used to disallow
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33627
diff
changeset
|
3671 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the |
efa325b58d74
Mention that `minibuffer-prompt-properties' can be used to disallow
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33627
diff
changeset
|
3672 `Inviolable' option. |
25853 | 3673 |
35680 | 3674 The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the |
25853 | 3675 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
3676 Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
3677 | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3678 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3679 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3680 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3681 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
30776 | 3682 property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3683 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3684 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3685 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3686 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3687 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
27144 | 3688 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
3689 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
3690 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
3691 functions. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3692 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3693 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3694 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3695 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
25853 | 3696 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3697 The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3698 |
30776 | 3699 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3700 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3701 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
30776 | 3702 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3703 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3704 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
3705 constrained position if that is different. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3706 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3707 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3708 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3709 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
30776 | 3710 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3711 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3712 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
30776 | 3713 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
3714 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is | |
3715 also considered to be `on the boundary'. | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3716 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3717 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3718 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3719 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3720 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3721 only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3722 |
30776 | 3723 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
3724 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. | |
3725 | |
3726 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. | |
3727 | |
3728 - Function: delete-field &optional POS | |
3729 | |
3730 Delete the field surrounding POS. | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3731 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3732 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3733 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3734 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3735 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3736 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3737 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3738 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
3739 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3740 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3741 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3742 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3743 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3744 Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3745 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3746 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
3747 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3748 then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3749 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3750 - Function: field-string &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3751 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3752 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3753 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3754 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3755 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3756 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3757 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3758 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3759 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3760 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3761 |
25853 | 3762 +++ |
3763 ** Image support. | |
3764 | |
3765 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
3766 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
3767 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
3768 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
3769 | |
3770 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
3771 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
3772 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
3773 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
3774 area. | |
3775 | |
3776 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
3777 | |
3778 *** Image specifications | |
3779 | |
3780 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
3781 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
3782 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
26403 | 3783 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
3784 described below are ignored. | |
25853 | 3785 |
3786 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
3787 | |
3788 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
3789 | |
28789 | 3790 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
3791 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
3792 to use for its ascent. |
28789 | 3793 |
3794 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
3795 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
3796 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
3797 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
29151 | 3798 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
3799 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and | |
3800 overlays that apply to the image. | |
25853 | 3801 |
3802 `:margin MARGIN' | |
3803 | |
35278 | 3804 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
3805 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the | |
3806 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. | |
25853 | 3807 |
3808 `:relief RELIEF' | |
3809 | |
3810 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
3811 around an image. | |
3812 | |
35364 | 3813 `:conversion ALGO' |
25853 | 3814 |
31636 | 3815 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
3816 | |
3817 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' | |
3818 edge-detection algorithm to the image. | |
3819 | |
3820 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means | |
3821 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a | |
3822 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at | |
3823 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels | |
3824 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the | |
3825 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the | |
3826 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at | |
3827 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown | |
3828 below. | |
3829 | |
3830 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 | |
3831 x-1/y x/y x+1/y | |
3832 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) | |
3833 | |
3834 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color | |
3835 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, | |
3836 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum | |
3837 of the factors' absolute values. | |
3838 | |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
3839 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
31636 | 3840 |
3841 (1 0 0 | |
3842 0 0 0 | |
3843 9 9 -1) | |
3844 | |
3845 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of | |
3846 | |
3847 ( 2 -1 0 | |
3848 -1 0 1 | |
3849 0 1 -2) | |
3850 | |
31728 | 3851 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
3852 ``disabled''. | |
3853 | |
31636 | 3854 `:mask MASK' |
3855 | |
3856 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for | |
3857 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the | |
3858 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the | |
3859 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the | |
35680 | 3860 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
31636 | 3861 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
3862 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the | |
3863 image. | |
3864 | |
3865 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images | |
3866 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying | |
3867 `:mask nil'. | |
25853 | 3868 |
3869 `:file FILE' | |
3870 | |
3871 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
3872 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
3873 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
3874 may be present in the image specification. | |
3875 | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3876 `:data DATA' |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3877 |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3878 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3879 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3880 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3881 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3882 |
25853 | 3883 *** Supported image types |
3884 | |
26034 | 3885 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
25853 | 3886 |
3887 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
3888 properties supported are | |
3889 | |
3890 `:foreground FG' | |
3891 | |
3892 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
3893 is the frame's foreground. | |
3894 | |
32572 | 3895 `:background BG' |
25853 | 3896 |
3897 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
3898 the frame's background color. | |
3899 | |
3900 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
3901 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
3902 instead of a `:file' property. | |
3903 | |
3904 `:width WIDTH' | |
3905 | |
3906 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
3907 | |
3908 `:height HEIGHT' | |
3909 | |
3910 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
3911 | |
3912 `:data DATA' | |
3913 | |
3914 DATA must be either | |
3915 | |
3916 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
3917 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
3918 | |
3919 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
3920 | |
3921 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
3922 bitmap. | |
3923 | |
28748 | 3924 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
3925 height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
3926 in the file. | |
3927 | |
25853 | 3928 **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
3929 | |
3930 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
3931 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
3932 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
3933 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
3934 | |
3935 Additional image properties supported are: | |
3936 | |
3937 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
3938 | |
3939 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
3940 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
3941 name. | |
3942 | |
3943 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
3944 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
3945 | |
3946 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
3947 to display compressed images. | |
3948 | |
3949 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
3950 | |
3951 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
32551
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3952 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3953 mono images are |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3954 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3955 `:foreground FG' |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3956 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3957 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3958 is the frame's foreground. |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3959 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3960 `:background FG' |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3961 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3962 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3963 the frame's background color. |
25853 | 3964 |
3965 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
3966 | |
3967 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
27055 | 3968 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
3969 are: | |
3970 | |
25853 | 3971 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
3972 | |
3973 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
3974 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
3975 properties defined. | |
3976 | |
3977 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
3978 | |
3979 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
3980 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
3981 | |
3982 Additional image properties supported are: | |
3983 | |
3984 `:index INDEX' | |
3985 | |
3986 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
35680 | 3987 multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large. |
25853 | 3988 |
3989 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
3990 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
3991 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
3992 every 0.1 seconds. | |
3993 | |
3994 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
3995 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
3996 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
3997 | |
3998 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
3999 (when (= idx max) | |
4000 (setq idx 0)) | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
4001 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
25853 | 4002 (save-excursion |
4003 (set-buffer buffer) | |
4004 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
4005 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
4006 (insert-image img "x")) | |
4007 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
4008 | |
4009 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
4010 | |
4011 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
4012 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
4013 properties defined. | |
4014 | |
4015 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
4016 | |
4017 Additional image properties supported are: | |
4018 | |
4019 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
4020 | |
4021 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
26034 | 4022 integer. This is a required property. |
25853 | 4023 |
4024 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
4025 | |
4026 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
26034 | 4027 must be a integer. This is an required property. |
25853 | 4028 |
4029 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
4030 | |
4031 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
4032 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
4033 files. This is an required property. | |
4034 | |
4035 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
4036 lisp/gs.el. | |
4037 | |
4038 *** Lisp interface. | |
4039 | |
26264 | 4040 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
4041 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
25853 | 4042 |
4043 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
4044 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
4045 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
28759 | 4046 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
4047 images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
25853 | 4048 |
4049 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
4050 | |
4051 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
4052 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
4053 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
4054 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
4055 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
4056 buffer. | |
4057 | |
4058 +++ | |
4059 ** Display margins. | |
4060 | |
4061 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
4062 and images. | |
4063 | |
4064 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
4065 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
4066 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
4067 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
4068 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
4069 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
4070 of the display margins. | |
4071 | |
4072 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
4073 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
4074 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
4075 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
4076 in this file). | |
4077 | |
4078 +++ | |
4079 ** Help display | |
4080 | |
4081 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
4082 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
4083 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
4084 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
4085 | |
30219 | 4086 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
30305 | 4087 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
30372 | 4088 the window in which the help was found. |
4089 | |
4090 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the | |
4091 `help-echo' text property was found. | |
4092 | |
4093 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and | |
4094 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. | |
4095 | |
4096 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with | |
30467
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
4097 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
30372 | 4098 mouse. |
30219 | 4099 |
4100 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a | |
4101 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. | |
4102 | |
4103 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to | |
4104 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a | |
4105 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. | |
4106 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is | |
4107 used as help string. | |
25853 | 4108 |
4109 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
4110 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
4111 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. |
25853 | 4112 |
4113 +++ | |
4114 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
4115 | |
4116 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
4117 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
4118 | |
4119 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
4120 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
4121 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
4122 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
4123 used. | |
4124 | |
26264 | 4125 (global-set-key [A-down] |
4126 #'(lambda () | |
25853 | 4127 (interactive) |
26264 | 4128 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 4129 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
26264 | 4130 (global-set-key [A-up] |
25853 | 4131 #'(lambda () |
4132 (interactive) | |
26264 | 4133 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 4134 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
4135 | |
4136 +++ | |
4137 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
4138 | |
4139 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
4140 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
4141 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
4142 is called with one argument, POS. | |
4143 | |
4144 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
4145 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
4146 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
4147 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
4148 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
4149 | |
4150 +++ | |
4151 ** Tool bar support. | |
4152 | |
4153 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
4154 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
4155 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
4156 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
4157 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
4158 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
4159 | |
4160 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
4161 | |
4162 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
4163 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
4164 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
26264 | 4165 |
25853 | 4166 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
4167 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
4168 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
4169 property (see below). | |
26264 | 4170 |
25853 | 4171 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
4172 binding are currently ignored. | |
4173 | |
4174 The following properties are recognized: | |
4175 | |
4176 `:enable FORM'. | |
26264 | 4177 |
25853 | 4178 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
4179 or disabled. | |
26264 | 4180 |
25853 | 4181 `:visible FORM' |
26264 | 4182 |
25853 | 4183 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
26264 | 4184 |
25853 | 4185 `:filter FUNCTION' |
4186 | |
4187 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
4188 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
4189 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
26264 | 4190 |
25853 | 4191 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
4192 | |
4193 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
4194 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
26264 | 4195 |
25853 | 4196 `:image IMAGES' |
4197 | |
4198 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
4199 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
4200 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
4201 | |
4202 Index Use when item is | |
4203 ---------------------------------------- | |
4204 0 enabled and selected | |
4205 1 enabled and deselected | |
4206 2 disabled and selected | |
4207 3 disabled and deselected | |
26264 | 4208 |
28946 | 4209 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
4210 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. | |
4211 | |
25853 | 4212 `:help HELP-STRING'. |
26264 | 4213 |
25853 | 4214 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
4215 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
4216 | |
31641 | 4217 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
31741 | 4218 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
4219 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the | |
4220 menu bar. | |
31641 | 4221 |
33484 | 4222 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
4223 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set | |
4224 buffer-locally to override the global map. | |
4225 | |
25853 | 4226 *** Tool-bar-related variables. |
4227 | |
4228 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
4229 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
4230 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
4231 | |
26264 | 4232 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
25853 | 4233 raised when the mouse moves over them. |
4234 | |
4235 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
4236 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
35278 | 4237 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
4238 vertical margins . Default is 1. | |
25853 | 4239 |
4240 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
4241 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
4242 | |
4243 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
4244 | |
4245 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
26264 | 4246 a tool bar item. If |
25853 | 4247 |
4248 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
4249 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
4250 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
4251 | |
4252 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
4253 | |
4254 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
4255 | |
4256 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
4257 item. | |
4258 | |
4259 ** Mode line changes. | |
4260 | |
4261 +++ | |
4262 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
4263 | |
4264 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
4265 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
4266 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
4267 | |
4268 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
4269 a `local-map' text property. | |
4270 | |
4271 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
4272 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
4273 | |
4274 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
4275 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
4276 `local-map' property. | |
4277 | |
4278 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
4279 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
4280 example. | |
4281 | |
26359
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
4282 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
4283 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
4284 |
25853 | 4285 +++ |
4286 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
4287 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
4288 | |
4289 +++ | |
4290 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
4291 | |
4292 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
4293 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
4294 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
4295 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
4296 line. | |
4297 | |
4298 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
4299 `header-line'. | |
4300 | |
4301 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
4302 position in the header-line. | |
4303 | |
4304 +++ | |
4305 ** Text property `display' | |
4306 | |
31827 | 4307 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
4308 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is | |
4309 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of | |
4310 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
25853 | 4311 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
4312 | |
31827 | 4313 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
4314 | |
4315 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other | |
4316 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. | |
4317 | |
4318 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left | |
4319 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in | |
4320 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING | |
4321 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
4322 simpler form STRING as property value. | |
4323 | |
25853 | 4324 *** Variable width and height spaces |
4325 | |
4326 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
4327 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
4328 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
4329 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
4330 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
4331 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
4332 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
4333 | |
4334 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
4335 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
4336 properties described below. | |
4337 | |
4338 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
4339 characters having the `display' property. | |
4340 | |
4341 - :width WIDTH | |
4342 | |
4343 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
4344 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
4345 | |
4346 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
4347 | |
4348 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
4349 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
4350 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
4351 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
4352 | |
4353 - :align-to HPOS | |
4354 | |
4355 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
4356 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
4357 | |
4358 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
4359 | |
4360 - :height HEIGHT | |
4361 | |
4362 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
4363 normal line height. | |
4364 | |
4365 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
4366 | |
4367 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
4368 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
4369 | |
4370 - :ascent ASCENT | |
4371 | |
4372 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
4373 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
4374 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
4375 equal to 100. | |
4376 | |
4377 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
4378 | |
4379 *** Images | |
4380 | |
4381 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
4382 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
4383 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
4384 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
4385 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
4386 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
4387 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
4388 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
4389 as display specification. | |
4390 | |
4391 *** Other display properties | |
4392 | |
33499 | 4393 - (space-width FACTOR) |
25853 | 4394 |
4395 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
4396 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
4397 integer or float. | |
4398 | |
33499 | 4399 - (height HEIGHT) |
25853 | 4400 |
4401 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
4402 | |
4403 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
4404 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
4405 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
4406 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
4407 a font is available counts as a step. | |
4408 | |
4409 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
4410 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
4411 | |
4412 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
4413 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
4414 | |
4415 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
4416 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
4417 | |
33499 | 4418 - (raise FACTOR) |
25853 | 4419 |
4420 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
4421 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
4422 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
4423 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
33499 | 4424 `height' subproperty. |
25853 | 4425 |
4426 *** Conditional display properties | |
4427 | |
4428 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
4429 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
4430 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
35680 | 4431 During evaluation, point is temporarily set to the end position of |
25853 | 4432 the text having the `display' property. |
4433 | |
4434 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
4435 `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
4436 | |
4437 +++ | |
4438 ** New menu separator types. | |
4439 | |
4440 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
4441 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
4442 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
4443 to specify other menu separator types. | |
4444 | |
4445 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
4446 | |
4447 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
4448 separator occurs. | |
4449 | |
4450 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
4451 | |
4452 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4453 | |
4454 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
4455 | |
4456 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4457 | |
4458 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
4459 | |
4460 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4461 | |
4462 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
4463 | |
4464 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4465 | |
4466 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
4467 | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
4468 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
25853 | 4469 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
4470 | |
4471 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
4472 | |
4473 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
4474 | |
4475 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
4476 | |
4477 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4478 | |
4479 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
4480 | |
4481 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
4482 | |
4483 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
4484 | |
4485 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4486 | |
4487 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
4488 | |
4489 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
4490 | |
4491 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
4492 | |
4493 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4494 | |
4495 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
4496 | |
4497 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
4498 | |
4499 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
4500 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
4501 | |
4502 +++ | |
4503 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
4504 | |
4505 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
4506 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
4507 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
4508 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
4509 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
4510 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
4511 default foreground is black. | |
4512 | |
4513 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
4514 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
4515 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
4516 | |
4517 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
4518 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
4519 | |
4520 +++ | |
4521 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
4522 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
4523 | |
4524 --- | |
4525 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
4526 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
4527 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
4528 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
4529 the original window start. | |
4530 | |
4531 --- | |
4532 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
4533 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
4534 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
4535 | |
4536 +++ | |
4537 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
4538 | |
4539 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
4540 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
4541 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
4542 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
4543 | |
4544 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
4545 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
4546 | |
4547 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
4548 | |
4549 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
4550 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
4551 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
4552 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
4553 temporarily to nil, for example | |
4554 | |
4555 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
4556 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
4557 | |
26264 | 4558 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
25853 | 4559 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
28094
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4560 |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4561 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4562 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4563 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4564 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4565 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4566 support a vertical-bar cursor). |
30786 | 4567 |
30922 | 4568 |
35469 | 4569 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4570 |
30922 | 4571 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
4572 | |
4573 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard | |
4574 input. | |
4575 | |
4576 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. | |
4577 | |
4578 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. | |
4579 | |
4580 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not | |
4581 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The | |
4582 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets | |
4583 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence | |
4584 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. | |
4585 | |
4586 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has | |
4587 been added. | |
4588 | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4589 |
30922 | 4590 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
4591 | |
4592 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. | |
4593 | |
35469 | 4594 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4595 |
30922 | 4596 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
4597 | |
4598 ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
4599 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4600 |
30922 | 4601 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4602 | |
4603 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
4604 | |
4605 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
4606 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
4607 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
4608 | |
4609 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
4610 is the one that is used. | |
4611 | |
4612 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
4613 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
4614 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
4615 separate from the command's regular output. | |
4616 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
4617 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
4618 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
4619 the buffer name. | |
4620 | |
4621 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
4622 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
4623 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
4624 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
4625 | |
4626 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
4627 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
4628 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
4629 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
4630 | |
4631 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
4632 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
4633 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
4634 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
4635 | |
4636 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
4637 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
4638 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
4639 they never ignore case. | |
4640 | |
4641 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
4642 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
4643 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
4644 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
4645 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
4646 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
4647 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
4648 | |
4649 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
4650 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
4651 | |
4652 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
4653 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
4654 | |
4655 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
4656 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
4657 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
4658 | |
4659 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
4660 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
4661 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
4662 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
4663 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
4664 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
4665 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
4666 | |
4667 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
4668 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
4669 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
4670 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
4671 | |
4672 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
4673 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
4674 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
4675 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
4676 | |
4677 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
4678 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
4679 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
4680 | |
4681 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
4682 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
4683 doesn't have any effect. | |
4684 | |
4685 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
4686 not one per buffer. | |
4687 | |
4688 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
4689 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
4690 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
4691 | |
4692 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
4693 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
4694 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
4695 | |
4696 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
4697 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
4698 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
4699 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
4700 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
4701 | |
4702 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
4703 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
4704 | |
4705 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
4706 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
4707 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
4708 | |
4709 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
4710 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
4711 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
4712 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
4713 | |
4714 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
4715 | |
4716 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
4717 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
4718 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
4719 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
4720 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
4721 | |
4722 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
4723 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
4724 | |
4725 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
4726 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
4727 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
4728 `?' on other systems. | |
4729 | |
4730 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
4731 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
4732 Unix. | |
4733 | |
4734 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
4735 current codepage when it starts. | |
4736 | |
4737 ** Mail changes | |
4738 | |
4739 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if | |
4740 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
4741 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
4742 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
4743 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
4744 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
4745 latin-1: | |
4746 | |
4747 MIME-version: 1.0 | |
4748 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
4749 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
4750 | |
4751 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
4752 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
4753 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
4754 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
4755 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
4756 | |
4757 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
4758 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
4759 mail. | |
4760 | |
4761 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
4762 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
4763 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
4764 list of possible coding systems. | |
4765 | |
4766 ** CC Mode changes | |
4767 | |
4768 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
4769 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
4770 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
4771 docstring for details. | |
4772 | |
4773 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
4774 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
4775 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
4776 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
4777 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
4778 | |
4779 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
4780 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
4781 | |
4782 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
4783 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
4784 | |
4785 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
4786 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
4787 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
4788 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
4789 anonymous classes. | |
4790 | |
4791 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
4792 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
4793 | |
4794 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
4795 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
4796 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
4797 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
4798 | |
4799 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
4800 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
4801 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
4802 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
4803 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
4804 | |
4805 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
4806 | |
4807 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
4808 | |
4809 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
4810 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
4811 | |
4812 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
4813 | |
4814 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
4815 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
4816 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
4817 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
4818 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
4819 | |
4820 ** Gnus changes. | |
4821 | |
4822 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
4823 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
4824 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
4825 | |
4826 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
4827 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
4828 group, which is created automatically. | |
4829 | |
4830 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
4831 values. | |
4832 | |
4833 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
4834 | |
4835 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
4836 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
4837 | |
4838 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
4839 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
4840 | |
4841 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
4842 | |
4843 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
4844 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
4845 | |
4846 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
4847 | |
4848 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
4849 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
4850 | |
4851 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
4852 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
4853 | |
4854 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
4855 control over simplification. | |
4856 | |
4857 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
4858 | |
4859 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
4860 limit. | |
4861 | |
4862 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
4863 | |
4864 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
4865 | |
4866 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | |
4867 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | |
4868 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
4869 | |
35680 | 4870 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
30922 | 4871 `a' forces normal posting method. |
4872 | |
4873 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
4874 -- `W d'. | |
4875 | |
4876 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
4877 to a non-nil value. | |
4878 | |
4879 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
4880 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
4881 | |
4882 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
4883 has been added. | |
4884 | |
4885 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
4886 | |
4887 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
4888 | |
4889 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
4890 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
4891 | |
4892 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
4893 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
4894 | |
4895 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
4896 | |
4897 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
4898 been added. | |
4899 | |
4900 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
4901 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
4902 | |
4903 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
4904 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
4905 | |
4906 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
4907 | |
4908 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
4909 | |
4910 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
4911 | |
4912 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
4913 | |
4914 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
4915 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
4916 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
4917 | |
4918 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
4919 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
4920 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
4921 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
4922 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
4923 | |
4924 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
4925 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
4926 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
4927 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
4928 | |
4929 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
4930 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
4931 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
4932 mismatch. | |
4933 | |
4934 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
4935 | |
4936 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
4937 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
4938 | |
4939 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
4940 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
4941 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
4942 removed from the label. | |
4943 | |
4944 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
4945 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
4946 | |
4947 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
4948 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
4949 | |
4950 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
4951 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
4952 expressions. | |
4953 | |
4954 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
4955 | |
4956 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
4957 | |
4958 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
4959 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
4960 | |
4961 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
4962 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
4963 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
4964 | |
4965 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
4966 changes with a special face. | |
4967 | |
4968 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
4969 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
4970 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4971 |
30922 | 4972 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4973 | |
4974 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
4975 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
4976 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
4977 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
4978 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
4979 | |
4980 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
4981 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
4982 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
4983 | |
4984 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
4985 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
4986 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
4987 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
4988 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
4989 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
4990 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
4991 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
4992 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
4993 | |
4994 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
4995 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
4996 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
4997 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
4998 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
4999 program. | |
5000 | |
5001 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
5002 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
5003 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
5004 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
5005 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
5006 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
5007 | |
5008 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
5009 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
5010 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
5011 was not documented clearly before. | |
5012 | |
5013 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
5014 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5015 |
30922 | 5016 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
5017 | |
5018 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
5019 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
5020 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
5021 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
5022 | |
5023 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
5024 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
5025 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
5026 | |
5027 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
5028 | |
5029 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
5030 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
5031 | |
5032 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
5033 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
5034 integers. | |
5035 | |
5036 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
5037 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
5038 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
5039 file names and attributes are returned. | |
5040 | |
5041 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
5042 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
35680 | 5043 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
30922 | 5044 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
5045 returns the result. | |
5046 | |
5047 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
5048 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
5049 | |
5050 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
5051 | |
5052 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
5053 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
5054 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
5055 optionally. | |
5056 | |
5057 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
5058 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
5059 | |
5060 ** | |
5061 The new function process-running-child-p | |
5062 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
5063 terminal to its own child process. | |
5064 | |
5065 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
5066 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
5067 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
5068 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
5069 | |
5070 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
5071 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
5072 | |
5073 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
5074 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
5075 | |
5076 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
5077 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
5078 to move or copy menu entries. | |
5079 | |
5080 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
5081 | |
5082 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
5083 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
5084 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
5085 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
5086 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
5087 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
5088 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
5089 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
5090 | |
5091 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
5092 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
5093 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
5094 | |
5095 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
5096 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
5097 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
5098 | |
35680 | 5099 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
30922 | 5100 |
5101 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
5102 across the boundary. | |
5103 | |
5104 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
5105 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
5106 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
5107 contains 8-bit characters. | |
5108 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
5109 contains invalid characters. | |
5110 | |
5111 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
5112 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
5113 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
5114 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
5115 way. | |
5116 | |
5117 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
5118 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
5119 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
5120 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
5121 | |
5122 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
5123 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
5124 | |
5125 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
5126 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
5127 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
5128 menus should always use the third argument. | |
5129 | |
5130 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
5131 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
5132 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
5133 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
5134 | |
5135 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
5136 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
5137 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
5138 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
5139 | |
5140 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
5141 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
5142 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
5143 echo area contents. | |
5144 | |
5145 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
5146 | |
5147 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
5148 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
5149 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
5150 | |
5151 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
5152 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
5153 means to clear out that attribute. | |
5154 | |
5155 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
5156 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
5157 | |
5158 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
5159 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
5160 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
5161 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
5162 | |
5163 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
5164 the gap of the current buffer. | |
5165 | |
5166 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
5167 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
5168 current buffer. | |
5169 | |
5170 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
5171 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
5172 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
5173 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5174 |
30922 | 5175 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5176 | |
5177 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
5178 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
5179 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
5180 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
5181 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
5182 | |
5183 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
5184 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
5185 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
5186 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
5187 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
5188 | |
5189 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
5190 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
5191 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
5192 | |
5193 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
5194 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
5195 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
5196 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
5197 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
5198 results. | |
5199 | |
5200 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
5201 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
5202 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
5203 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5204 |
30922 | 5205 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5206 | |
5207 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
5208 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
5209 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
5210 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
5211 | |
5212 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
5213 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
5214 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
5215 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
5216 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
5217 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
5218 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
5219 region. | |
5220 | |
5221 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
5222 selective undo. | |
5223 | |
5224 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
5225 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
5226 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
5227 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
5228 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
5229 | |
5230 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
5231 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
5232 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
5233 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
5234 | |
5235 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
5236 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
5237 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
5238 something that most users not do. | |
5239 | |
5240 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
5241 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
5242 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
5243 applications. | |
5244 | |
5245 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
5246 pasting operations. | |
5247 | |
5248 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
5249 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
5250 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
5251 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
5252 `ps-printer-name'. | |
5253 | |
5254 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
5255 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
5256 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
5257 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
5258 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
5259 hits a new word. | |
5260 | |
5261 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
5262 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
5263 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
5264 | |
5265 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
5266 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
5267 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
5268 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
5269 | |
5270 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
5271 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
5272 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
5273 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
5274 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
5275 | |
5276 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
5277 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
5278 | |
5279 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
5280 | |
5281 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
5282 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
5283 respectively. | |
5284 | |
5285 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
5286 | |
5287 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
5288 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
5289 | |
5290 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
5291 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
5292 | |
5293 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
5294 | |
5295 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
5296 | |
5297 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
5298 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
5299 | |
5300 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
5301 given in the following case: | |
5302 o When you are using a complex input method. | |
5303 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
5304 | |
5305 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
5306 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
5307 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
5308 setting it to t is helpful. | |
5309 | |
5310 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
5311 | |
5312 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
5313 keys: | |
5314 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
5315 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
5316 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
5317 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
5318 environment. | |
5319 | |
5320 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
5321 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
5322 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
5323 get | |
5324 | |
5325 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
5326 | |
5327 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
5328 | |
5329 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
5330 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
5331 | |
5332 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
5333 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
5334 its owner and group. | |
5335 | |
5336 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
5337 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
5338 | |
5339 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
5340 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
5341 | |
5342 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
5343 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
5344 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
5345 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
5346 | |
5347 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
5348 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
5349 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
5350 for writing keyboard macros. | |
5351 | |
5352 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
5353 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
5354 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
5355 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
5356 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
5357 info. | |
5358 | |
5359 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
5360 | |
5361 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
5362 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
5363 contents only. | |
5364 | |
5365 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
5366 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
5367 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
5368 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
5369 | |
5370 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
5371 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
5372 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
5373 | |
5374 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
5375 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
5376 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
5377 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
5378 | |
5379 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
5380 failure if the command produces no output. | |
5381 | |
5382 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
5383 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
5384 the mouse. | |
5385 | |
5386 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
5387 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
5388 function and variable names. | |
5389 | |
5390 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
5391 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
5392 file-coding-system-alist. | |
5393 | |
5394 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
5395 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
5396 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
5397 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
5398 according to the current fontset. | |
5399 | |
5400 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
5401 | |
5402 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
5403 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
5404 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
5405 | |
5406 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
5407 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
5408 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
5409 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
5410 | |
5411 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
5412 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
5413 | |
5414 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
5415 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
5416 | |
5417 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
5418 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
5419 command keys. | |
5420 | |
5421 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
5422 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
5423 | |
5424 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
5425 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
5426 all variables that have documentation. | |
5427 | |
5428 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
5429 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
5430 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
5431 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
5432 it should show; the default is 20. | |
5433 | |
5434 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
5435 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
5436 of your input. | |
5437 | |
5438 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
5439 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
5440 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
5441 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
5442 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
5443 Newly added options are included as well. | |
5444 | |
5445 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
5446 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
5447 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
5448 | |
5449 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
5450 Customize menu. | |
5451 | |
5452 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
5453 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
5454 | |
5455 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
5456 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
5457 invoked. | |
5458 | |
5459 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
5460 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
5461 The default is 1. | |
5462 | |
5463 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
5464 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
5465 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
5466 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
5467 sensibly. | |
5468 | |
5469 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
5470 | |
5471 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
5472 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
5473 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
5474 | |
5475 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
5476 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
5477 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
5478 every night. | |
5479 | |
5480 ** Desktop changes | |
5481 | |
5482 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
5483 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
5484 | |
5485 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored | |
5486 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
5487 | |
5488 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
5489 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
5490 | |
5491 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
5492 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
5493 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
5494 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
5495 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
5496 made invisible again. | |
5497 | |
5498 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
5499 | |
5500 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
5501 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
5502 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
5503 toggle. | |
5504 | |
5505 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
5506 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
5507 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
5508 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
5509 rmail-default-body-file. | |
5510 | |
5511 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
5512 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
5513 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
5514 | |
5515 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
5516 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
5517 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
5518 | |
5519 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
5520 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
5521 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
5522 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
5523 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
5524 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
5525 | |
5526 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
5527 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
5528 provided by feedmail are: | |
5529 | |
5530 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
5531 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
5532 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
5533 | |
5534 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
5535 be prompted for confirmation | |
5536 | |
5537 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
5538 | |
5539 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
5540 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
5541 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
5542 | |
5543 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
5544 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
5545 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
5546 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
5547 | |
5548 ** Dired changes | |
5549 | |
5550 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
5551 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
5552 | |
5553 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
5554 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
5555 | |
5556 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
5557 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
5558 for a specified regexp. | |
5559 | |
5560 ** VC Changes | |
5561 | |
5562 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
5563 conveniently. | |
5564 | |
5565 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
5566 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
5567 Dired. | |
5568 | |
5569 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
5570 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
5571 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
5572 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
5573 | |
5574 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
5575 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
5576 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
5577 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
5578 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
5579 | |
5580 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
5581 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
5582 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
5583 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
5584 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
5585 | |
5586 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
5587 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
5588 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | |
5589 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | |
5590 | |
5591 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
5592 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
5593 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
5594 | |
5595 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
5596 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
5597 session to resolve them. | |
5598 | |
5599 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
5600 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
5601 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
5602 uses as well). | |
5603 | |
5604 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
5605 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
5606 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
5607 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
5608 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
5609 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
5610 using ediff. | |
5611 | |
5612 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
5613 | |
5614 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
5615 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
5616 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
5617 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
5618 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
5619 | |
5620 ** Frame name display changes | |
5621 | |
5622 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
5623 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
5624 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
5625 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
5626 | |
5627 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
5628 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
5629 menu. | |
5630 | |
5631 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
5632 | |
5633 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
5634 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
5635 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
5636 | |
5637 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
5638 | |
5639 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
5640 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
5641 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
5642 | |
5643 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
5644 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
5645 the following line. | |
5646 | |
5647 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
5648 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
5649 previously sent input. | |
5650 | |
5651 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
5652 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
5653 as the search string. | |
5654 | |
5655 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
5656 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
5657 | |
5658 ** C mode changes | |
5659 | |
5660 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
5661 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
5662 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
5663 definition. | |
5664 | |
5665 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
5666 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
5667 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
5668 style is still the default however. | |
5669 | |
5670 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
5671 | |
5672 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
5673 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
5674 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
5675 | |
5676 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
5677 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
5678 | |
5679 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
5680 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
5681 | |
5682 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
5683 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
5684 | |
5685 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
5686 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
5687 | |
5688 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
5689 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
5690 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
5691 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
5692 | |
5693 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
5694 | |
5695 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | |
5696 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | |
5697 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
5698 | |
5699 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
5700 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
5701 expanding dynamically. | |
5702 | |
5703 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
5704 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
5705 | |
5706 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
5707 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
5708 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
5709 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
5710 | |
5711 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
5712 | |
5713 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
5714 | |
5715 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
5716 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
5717 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
5718 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
5719 against the first word in the title. | |
5720 | |
5721 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
5722 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
5723 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
5724 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | |
5725 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | |
5726 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | |
5727 | |
5728 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
5729 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
5730 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
5731 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
5732 | |
5733 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
5734 | |
5735 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
5736 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
5737 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
5738 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
5739 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
5740 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
5741 | |
5742 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
5743 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
5744 | |
5745 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
5746 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
35680 | 5747 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
30922 | 5748 |
5749 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
5750 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
5751 | |
5752 ** Ispell changes. | |
5753 | |
5754 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | |
5755 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
5756 are identified by syntax tables in effect. | |
5757 | |
5758 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
5759 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
5760 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
5761 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
5762 include: | |
5763 | |
5764 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
5765 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
5766 | |
5767 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
5768 | |
5769 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
5770 | |
5771 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
5772 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
5773 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
5774 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
5775 | |
5776 *** New recursive parser. | |
5777 | |
5778 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
5779 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
5780 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
5781 | |
5782 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
5783 | |
5784 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | |
5785 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
5786 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
5787 | |
5788 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
5789 | |
5790 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
5791 | |
5792 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
5793 | |
5794 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
5795 | |
5796 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
5797 | |
5798 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
5799 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
5800 | |
5801 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
5802 | |
5803 *** References to external documents. | |
5804 | |
5805 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
5806 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
5807 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
5808 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
5809 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
5810 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
5811 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
5812 | |
5813 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
5814 | |
35680 | 5815 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
30922 | 5816 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
5817 | |
5818 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
5819 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
5820 | |
5821 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
5822 | |
5823 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
5824 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
5825 | |
5826 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
5827 | |
5828 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
5829 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
5830 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
5831 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
5832 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
5833 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
5834 more. | |
5835 | |
5836 *** Support for the varioref package | |
5837 | |
5838 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
5839 | |
5840 *** New hooks | |
5841 | |
5842 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
5843 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
5844 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
5845 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
5846 | |
5847 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
5848 | |
5849 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
5850 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
5851 | |
5852 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
5853 | |
5854 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
5855 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
5856 fontified, use | |
5857 | |
5858 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
5859 | |
5860 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
5861 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
5862 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
5863 directories that contain the same file name. | |
5864 | |
5865 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
5866 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
5867 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
5868 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
5869 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
5870 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
5871 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
5872 directory. | |
5873 | |
5874 ** New modes and packages | |
5875 | |
5876 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
5877 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
5878 it, but some do not. | |
5879 | |
5880 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
5881 code. | |
5882 | |
5883 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
5884 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
5885 around in a buffer. | |
5886 | |
5887 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
5888 | |
5889 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
5890 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
5891 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
5892 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
5893 | |
5894 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
5895 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
5896 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
5897 | |
5898 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
5899 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
5900 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
5901 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
5902 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
5903 the like. | |
5904 | |
5905 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
5906 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
5907 | |
5908 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
5909 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
5910 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
5911 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
5912 | |
5913 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
5914 | |
5915 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
5916 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
5917 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
5918 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
5919 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
5920 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
5921 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
5922 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
5923 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
5924 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
5925 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
5926 | |
5927 Platform-specific modes: | |
5928 | |
5929 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
5930 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
5931 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
5932 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
5933 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
5934 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
5935 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
5936 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
5937 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5938 |
30922 | 5939 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
5940 | |
5941 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
5942 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
5943 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
5944 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
5945 | |
5946 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
5947 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
5948 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
5949 | |
5950 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
5951 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
5952 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
5953 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
5954 | |
5955 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
5956 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
5957 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
5958 environment. | |
5959 | |
5960 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
5961 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
5962 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
5963 current input method for reading this one event. | |
5964 | |
5965 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
5966 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
5967 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
5968 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
5969 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
5970 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5971 |
30922 | 5972 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
5973 | |
5974 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
5975 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
5976 | |
5977 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
5978 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
5979 always increases point by 1. | |
5980 | |
5981 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
5982 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
5983 | |
5984 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
5985 | |
5986 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
5987 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
5988 default value changed. For example, | |
5989 | |
5990 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
5991 :type 'integer | |
5992 :group 'foo | |
5993 :version "20.3") | |
5994 | |
5995 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | |
5996 :version "20.3") | |
5997 | |
5998 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
5999 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
6000 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
6001 `:version' in the top level group. | |
6002 | |
6003 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
6004 | |
6005 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
6006 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
6007 | |
6008 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
6009 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
6010 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
6011 to themselves. | |
6012 | |
6013 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
6014 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
6015 values whatever. | |
6016 | |
6017 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
6018 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
6019 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
6020 | |
6021 ** Frame-local variables. | |
6022 | |
6023 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
6024 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
6025 local bindings for that variable. | |
6026 | |
6027 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
6028 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
6029 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
6030 parameter name. | |
6031 | |
6032 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
6033 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
6034 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
6035 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
6036 | |
6037 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
6038 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
6039 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
6040 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
6041 | |
6042 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
6043 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
6044 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
6045 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
6046 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
6047 | |
6048 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
6049 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
6050 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
6051 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
6052 | |
6053 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
6054 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
6055 | |
6056 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
6057 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
6058 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
6059 | |
6060 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
6061 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
6062 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
6063 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
6064 | |
6065 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
6066 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
6067 empty input. | |
6068 | |
6069 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
6070 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
6071 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
6072 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
6073 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
6074 | |
6075 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
6076 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
6077 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
6078 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
6079 | |
6080 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
6081 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
6082 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
6083 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
6084 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
6085 | |
6086 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
6087 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
6088 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
6089 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
6090 | |
6091 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
6092 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
6093 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
6094 | |
6095 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
6096 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
6097 was directed to display this buffer. | |
6098 | |
6099 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
6100 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
6101 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
6102 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
6103 set-window-configuration. | |
6104 | |
6105 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
6106 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
6107 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
6108 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
6109 | |
6110 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
6111 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
6112 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
6113 | |
6114 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
6115 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
6116 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
6117 | |
6118 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
6119 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
6120 | |
6121 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
6122 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
6123 | |
6124 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
6125 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
6126 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
6127 | |
6128 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
6129 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
6130 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
6131 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
6132 | |
6133 ** Menu changes | |
6134 | |
6135 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
6136 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
6137 better supported. | |
6138 | |
6139 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
6140 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
6141 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
6142 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
6143 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
6144 | |
6145 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
6146 | |
6147 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
6148 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
6149 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
6150 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
6151 | |
6152 The format is: | |
6153 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
6154 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
6155 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
6156 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
6157 The supported properties include | |
6158 | |
6159 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
6160 item is enabled. | |
6161 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
6162 item should appear in the menu. | |
6163 :filter FILTER-FN | |
6164 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | |
6165 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
6166 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
6167 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
6168 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
6169 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
30922 | 6170 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
6171 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
6172 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
6173 keyboard binding. | |
6174 :key-sequence nil | |
6175 This means that the command normally has no | |
6176 keyboard equivalent. | |
6177 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
6178 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
6179 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
6180 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
6181 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
6182 | |
6183 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
6184 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
6185 | |
6186 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
6187 | |
6188 ** New event types | |
6189 | |
6190 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
6191 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
6192 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
6193 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
6194 | |
6195 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
6196 | |
6197 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
6198 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
6199 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
6200 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
6201 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
6202 forward, away from the user. | |
6203 | |
6204 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
6205 | |
6206 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
6207 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
6208 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
6209 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
6210 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
6211 | |
6212 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
6213 | |
6214 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
6215 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
6216 that were dragged and dropped. | |
6217 | |
6218 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
6219 | |
6220 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
6221 | |
6222 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
6223 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
6224 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
6225 | |
6226 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
6227 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
6228 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
6229 | |
6230 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
6231 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
6232 | |
6233 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
6234 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
6235 | |
6236 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
6237 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
6238 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
6239 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
6240 | |
6241 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
6242 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
6243 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
6244 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
6245 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
6246 | |
6247 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
6248 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
6249 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
6250 consistent with the new representation. | |
6251 | |
6252 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
6253 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
6254 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
6255 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
6256 | |
6257 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
6258 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
6259 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
6260 | |
6261 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
6262 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
6263 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
6264 | |
6265 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
6266 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
6267 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
6268 | |
6269 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
6270 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
6271 | |
6272 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
6273 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
6274 | |
6275 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
6276 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
6277 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
6278 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
6279 | |
6280 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
6281 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
6282 | |
6283 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
6284 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
6285 buffer or string being searched. | |
6286 | |
6287 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
6288 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
6289 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
6290 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
6291 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
6292 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
6293 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
6294 | |
6295 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
6296 | |
6297 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
6298 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
6299 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
6300 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
6301 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
6302 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
6303 define-coding-system-alias. | |
6304 | |
6305 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
6306 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
6307 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
6308 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
6309 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
6310 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
6311 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
6312 `iso-8859-1'. | |
6313 | |
6314 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
6315 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
6316 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
6317 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
6318 | |
6319 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
6320 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
6321 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
6322 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
6323 | |
6324 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
6325 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
6326 This function requires a user interaction. | |
6327 | |
6328 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
6329 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
6330 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
6331 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
6332 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
6333 select-safe-coding-system. | |
6334 | |
6335 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
6336 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
6337 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
6338 was done. | |
6339 | |
6340 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
6341 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
6342 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
6343 | |
6344 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
6345 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
6346 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
6347 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
6348 | |
6349 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
6350 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
6351 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
6352 converted. | |
6353 | |
6354 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
6355 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
6356 | |
6357 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
6358 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
6359 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
6360 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
6361 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
6362 range of characters. | |
6363 | |
6364 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
6365 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
6366 | |
6367 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
6368 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
6369 | |
6370 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
6371 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
6372 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
6373 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
6374 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
6375 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
6376 | |
6377 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
6378 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
6379 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
6380 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
6381 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
6382 | |
6383 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
6384 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
6385 | |
6386 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
6387 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
6388 | |
6389 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
6390 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
6391 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
6392 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
6393 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
6394 |
30922 | 6395 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
6396 | |
6397 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
6398 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
6399 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
6400 tree structure. | |
6401 | |
6402 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
6403 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
6404 | |
6405 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
6406 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
6407 in your .emacs file.) | |
6408 | |
6409 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
6410 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
6411 | |
6412 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
6413 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
6414 | |
6415 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
6416 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
6417 kills the region. | |
6418 | |
6419 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
6420 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
6421 | |
6422 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
6423 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
6424 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
6425 | |
6426 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
6427 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
6428 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
6429 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
6430 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
6431 past.) | |
6432 | |
6433 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
6434 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
6435 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
6436 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
6437 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
6438 | |
6439 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
6440 and is an alias for it. | |
6441 | |
6442 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
6443 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
6444 | |
6445 ** Scrolling changes | |
6446 | |
6447 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
6448 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
6449 | |
6450 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
6451 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
6452 where it started. | |
6453 | |
6454 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
6455 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
6456 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
6457 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
6458 | |
6459 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
6460 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
6461 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
6462 recenters the window. | |
6463 | |
6464 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
6465 | |
6466 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
6467 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
6468 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
6469 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
6470 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
6471 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
6472 | |
6473 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
6474 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
6475 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
6476 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
6477 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
6478 | |
6479 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
6480 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
6481 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
6482 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
6483 | |
6484 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
6485 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
6486 | |
6487 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
6488 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
6489 | |
6490 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
6491 | |
6492 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
6493 | |
6494 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
6495 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
6496 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
6497 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
6498 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
6499 | |
6500 *** Input methods | |
6501 | |
6502 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
6503 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
6504 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
6505 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
6506 support several input methods. | |
6507 | |
6508 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
6509 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
6510 work. | |
6511 | |
6512 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
6513 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
6514 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
6515 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
6516 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
6517 letter. | |
6518 | |
6519 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
6520 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
6521 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
6522 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
6523 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
6524 | |
6525 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
6526 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
6527 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
6528 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
6529 | |
6530 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
6531 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
6532 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
6533 the first guess is wrong. | |
6534 | |
6535 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
6536 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
6537 | |
6538 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
6539 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
6540 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
6541 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
6542 | |
6543 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
6544 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
6545 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
6546 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
6547 | |
6548 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
6549 | |
6550 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
6551 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
6552 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
6553 what you want. | |
6554 | |
6555 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
6556 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
6557 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
6558 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
6559 | |
6560 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
6561 character conversion as well. | |
6562 | |
6563 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
6564 | |
6565 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
6566 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
6567 requires using many fonts. | |
6568 | |
6569 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
6570 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
6571 | |
6572 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
6573 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
6574 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
6575 you would use a font. | |
6576 | |
6577 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
6578 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
6579 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
6580 | |
6581 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
6582 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
6583 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
6584 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
6585 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
6586 | |
6587 *** Defining fontsets. | |
6588 | |
6589 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
6590 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
6591 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
6592 | |
6593 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
6594 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
6595 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
6596 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
6597 | |
6598 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
6599 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
6600 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
6601 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
6602 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
6603 | |
6604 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
6605 The resource value should have this form: | |
6606 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
6607 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
6608 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
6609 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
6610 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
6611 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
6612 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
35863
534be6e166a6
Yet another bunch of typo fizes from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35862
diff
changeset
|
6613 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
534be6e166a6
Yet another bunch of typo fizes from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35862
diff
changeset
|
6614 should specify an actual font to use for that character set. |
30922 | 6615 |
6616 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
6617 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
6618 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
6619 | |
6620 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
6621 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
6622 following resource, | |
6623 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
6624 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
6625 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
6626 Here is the substitution rule: | |
6627 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
6628 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
6629 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
6630 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
6631 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
6632 | |
6633 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
6634 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
6635 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
6636 | |
6637 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
6638 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
6639 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
6640 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
6641 fontsets. | |
6642 | |
6643 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
6644 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
6645 | |
6646 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
6647 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
6648 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
6649 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
6650 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
6651 system for new files that you create. | |
6652 | |
6653 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
6654 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
6655 whole Emacs session. | |
6656 | |
6657 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
6658 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
6659 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
6660 | |
6661 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
6662 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
6663 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
6664 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
6665 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
6666 | |
6667 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
6668 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
6669 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
6670 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
6671 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
6672 | |
6673 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
6674 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
6675 | |
6676 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
6677 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
6678 | |
6679 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
6680 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
6681 | |
6682 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
6683 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
6684 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
6685 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
6686 of the file. | |
6687 | |
6688 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
6689 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
6690 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
6691 translated into that character code. | |
6692 | |
6693 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
6694 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
6695 | |
6696 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
6697 | |
6698 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
6699 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
6700 | |
6701 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
6702 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
6703 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
6704 | |
6705 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
6706 | |
6707 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
6708 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
6709 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
6710 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
6711 designed to work with terminals. | |
6712 | |
6713 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
6714 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
6715 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
6716 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
6717 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
6718 in the corresponding buffer. | |
6719 | |
6720 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
6721 | |
6722 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
6723 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
6724 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
6725 | |
6726 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
6727 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
6728 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
6729 want to use. | |
6730 | |
6731 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
6732 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
6733 | |
6734 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
6735 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
6736 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
6737 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
6738 | |
6739 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
6740 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
6741 related information. | |
6742 | |
6743 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
6744 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
6745 scripts. | |
6746 | |
6747 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
6748 information about the support for a particular language. | |
6749 You specify the language as an argument. | |
6750 | |
6751 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
6752 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
6753 first dash. | |
6754 | |
6755 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
6756 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
6757 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
6758 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
6759 | |
6760 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
6761 B big5 (Chinese) | |
6762 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
6763 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
6764 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
6765 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
6766 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
6767 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
6768 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
6769 R koi8 (Russian) | |
6770 Q tibetan | |
6771 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
6772 T lao | |
6773 T tis620 (Thai) | |
6774 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
6775 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
6776 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
6777 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
6778 z hz (Chinese) | |
6779 | |
6780 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
6781 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
6782 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
6783 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
6784 | |
6785 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
6786 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
6787 | |
6788 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
6789 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
6790 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
6791 Rmail files themselves. | |
6792 | |
6793 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
6794 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
6795 | |
6796 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
6797 for sending mail: | |
6798 | |
6799 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
6800 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
6801 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
6802 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
6803 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
6804 | |
6805 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
6806 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
6807 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
6808 translations. | |
6809 | |
6810 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
6811 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
6812 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
6813 without any conversion. | |
6814 | |
6815 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
6816 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
6817 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
6818 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
6819 | |
6820 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
6821 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
6822 | |
6823 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
6824 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
6825 | |
6826 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
6827 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
6828 | |
6829 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
6830 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
6831 in the buffer before point. | |
6832 | |
6833 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
6834 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
6835 you are using. | |
6836 | |
6837 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
6838 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
6839 | |
6840 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
6841 | |
6842 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
6843 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
6844 | |
6845 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
6846 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
6847 can become a bottleneck. | |
6848 | |
6849 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
6850 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
6851 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
6852 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
6853 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
6854 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
6855 | |
6856 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
6857 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
6858 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
6859 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
6860 | |
6861 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
6862 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
6863 show-paren-mode. | |
6864 | |
6865 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
6866 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
6867 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
6868 | |
6869 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
6870 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
6871 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
6872 | |
6873 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
6874 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
6875 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
6876 | |
6877 ** Changes in View mode. | |
6878 | |
6879 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
6880 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
6881 | |
6882 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
6883 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
6884 | |
6885 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
6886 previous state. | |
6887 | |
6888 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
6889 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
6890 | |
6891 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
6892 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
6893 not just the selected window. | |
6894 | |
6895 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
6896 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
6897 turns View mode on or off. | |
6898 | |
6899 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
6900 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
6901 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
6902 | |
6903 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
6904 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
6905 | |
6906 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
6907 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
6908 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
6909 which version to compare with. | |
6910 | |
6911 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
6912 blocks if a match is inside the block. | |
6913 | |
6914 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
6915 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
6916 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
6917 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
6918 | |
6919 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
6920 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
6921 blocks, all of them or none. | |
6922 | |
6923 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
6924 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
6925 confirmation first. | |
6926 | |
6927 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
6928 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
6929 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
6930 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
6931 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
6932 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
6933 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
6934 | |
6935 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
6936 | |
6937 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
6938 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
6939 | |
6940 ** M-x occur changes. | |
6941 | |
6942 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
6943 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
6944 | |
6945 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
6946 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
6947 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
6948 | |
6949 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
6950 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
6951 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
6952 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
6953 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
6954 | |
6955 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
6956 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
6957 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
6958 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
6959 | |
6960 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
6961 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
6962 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
6963 | |
6964 ** Outline mode changes. | |
6965 | |
6966 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
6967 | |
6968 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
6969 | |
6970 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
6971 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
6972 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
6973 was already active. | |
6974 | |
6975 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
6976 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
6977 get confused by it. | |
6978 | |
6979 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
6980 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
6981 | |
6982 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
6983 | |
6984 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
6985 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
6986 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
6987 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
6988 | |
6989 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
6990 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
6991 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
6992 | |
6993 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
6994 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
6995 values. | |
6996 | |
6997 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
6998 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
6999 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
7000 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
7001 | |
7002 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
7003 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
7004 can be. The default value is 30. | |
7005 | |
7006 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
7007 | |
7008 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
7009 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
7010 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
7011 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
7012 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
7013 behavior. | |
7014 | |
7015 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
7016 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
7017 | |
7018 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
7019 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
7020 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
7021 buffer that shows the original message. | |
7022 | |
7023 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
7024 with separator lines around the contents. | |
7025 | |
7026 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
7027 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
7028 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
7029 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
7030 | |
7031 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
7032 | |
7033 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
7034 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
7035 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
7036 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
7037 | |
7038 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
7039 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
7040 /etc/passwd. | |
7041 | |
7042 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
7043 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
7044 /etc/passwd. | |
7045 | |
7046 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
7047 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
7048 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
7049 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
7050 | |
7051 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
7052 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
7053 be taken to be magic. | |
7054 | |
7055 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
7056 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
7057 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
7058 | |
7059 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
7060 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
7061 | |
7062 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
7063 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
7064 | |
7065 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
7066 | |
7067 new key dired.el binding old key | |
7068 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
7069 * c dired-change-marks c | |
7070 * m dired-mark m | |
7071 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
7072 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
7073 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
7074 * u dired-unmark u | |
7075 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
7076 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
7077 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
7078 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
7079 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
7080 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
7081 | |
7082 ** Rmail changes. | |
7083 | |
7084 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
7085 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
7086 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
7087 each time you run it. | |
7088 | |
7089 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
7090 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
7091 | |
7092 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
7093 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
7094 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
7095 | |
7096 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
7097 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
7098 | |
7099 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
7100 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
7101 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
7102 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
7103 for output. | |
7104 | |
7105 ** Gnus changes. | |
7106 | |
7107 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
7108 | |
7109 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | |
7110 Gnus. | |
7111 | |
7112 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
7113 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | |
7114 | |
7115 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
7116 article mode line. | |
7117 | |
7118 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
7119 | |
7120 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
7121 | |
7122 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
7123 | |
7124 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
7125 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
7126 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
7127 | |
7128 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
7129 | |
7130 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
7131 | |
7132 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
7133 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
7134 | |
7135 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
7136 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
7137 used to pick articles. | |
7138 | |
7139 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
7140 another have been added. | |
7141 | |
7142 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
7143 | |
7144 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
7145 generating lines in buffers. | |
7146 | |
7147 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
7148 `M-C-_'. | |
7149 | |
7150 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
7151 | |
7152 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
7153 | |
7154 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
7155 | |
7156 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
7157 | |
7158 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | |
7159 | |
7160 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
7161 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
7162 | |
7163 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
7164 the native server. | |
7165 | |
7166 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
7167 | |
7168 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
7169 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
7170 | |
7171 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
7172 | |
7173 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
7174 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
7175 | |
7176 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
7177 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
7178 | |
7179 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
7180 a group. | |
7181 | |
7182 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
7183 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
7184 | |
7185 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
7186 | |
7187 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
7188 | |
7189 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
7190 | |
7191 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
7192 | |
7193 Use the `Y c' command. | |
7194 | |
7195 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
7196 | |
7197 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
7198 | |
7199 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
7200 | |
7201 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
7202 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
7203 | |
7204 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | |
7205 | |
7206 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
7207 | |
7208 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
7209 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
7210 | |
7211 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
7212 | |
7213 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
7214 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
7215 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
7216 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
7217 this issue.) | |
7218 | |
7219 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
7220 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
7221 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
7222 | |
7223 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
7224 | |
7225 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
7226 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
7227 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
7228 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
7229 for reading and posting). | |
7230 | |
7231 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
7232 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
7233 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
7234 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
7235 there. | |
7236 | |
7237 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
7238 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
7239 | |
7240 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
7241 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
7242 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
7243 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
7244 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
7245 | |
7246 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
7247 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
7248 | |
7249 ** CC mode changes. | |
7250 | |
7251 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
7252 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
7253 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
7254 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
7255 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
7256 loaded. | |
7257 | |
7258 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
7259 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | |
7260 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | |
7261 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | |
7262 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
7263 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | |
7264 | |
7265 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
7266 of the current buffer. | |
7267 | |
7268 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
7269 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
7270 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
7271 | |
7272 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
7273 style that the Python developers like. | |
7274 | |
7275 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
7276 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
7277 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
7278 | |
7279 ** VC Changes [new] | |
7280 | |
36908
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7281 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
30922 | 7282 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
7283 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
7284 | |
7285 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
7286 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
7287 developers. | |
7288 | |
7289 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
7290 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
7291 | |
7292 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
7293 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
7294 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
7295 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
7296 | |
7297 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
7298 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
7299 | |
7300 ** Calendar changes. | |
7301 | |
36908
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7302 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7303 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7304 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7305 following/previous years. |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7306 |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7307 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7308 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7309 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7310 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7311 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a |
365eecf7e7d7
Added a note about new support for the Baha'i calendar.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
36885
diff
changeset
|
7312 supposed attribute of God. |
30922 | 7313 |
7314 ** ps-print changes | |
7315 | |
37289 | 7316 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page |
7317 layout. | |
7318 | |
7319 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup) | |
7320 | |
7321 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to | |
7322 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your | |
7323 printer system has this behavior, set variable | |
7324 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t. | |
7325 | |
7326 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a | |
7327 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the | |
37375 | 7328 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014). |
37289 | 7329 |
7330 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for | |
7331 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are: | |
7332 | |
7333 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'. | |
7334 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex | |
7335 printing for your printer. | |
7336 | |
7337 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the | |
7338 setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
7339 | |
7340 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using | |
7341 the setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
7342 | |
7343 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on | |
7344 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If | |
7345 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for | |
7346 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil, | |
7347 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom. | |
7348 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil. | |
7349 The default value is nil. | |
7350 | |
7351 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame | |
7352 properties alist. Valid frame properties are: | |
7353 | |
7354 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color. | |
7355 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black | |
7356 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a | |
7357 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which | |
7358 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each | |
7359 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright | |
7360 color). The default is 0 ("black"). | |
7361 | |
7362 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color). | |
7363 The default is 0.9 ("gray90"). | |
7364 | |
7365 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color). | |
7366 The default is 0 ("black"). | |
7367 | |
7368 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color). | |
7369 The default is 0 ("black"). | |
7370 | |
7371 border-width Specify the border width. | |
7372 The default is 0.4. | |
7373 | |
7374 Any other property is ignored. | |
7375 | |
7376 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the | |
7377 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for | |
7378 documentation). | |
7379 | |
7380 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are: | |
7381 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame', | |
7382 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad', | |
7383 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and | |
7384 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those | |
7385 controlling headers. | |
7386 | |
7387 *** Color management (subgroup) | |
7388 | |
7389 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in | |
7390 color. | |
7391 | |
7392 *** Face Management (subgroup) | |
7393 | |
7394 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors, | |
7395 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face | |
7396 background should be used. Valid values are: | |
7397 | |
7398 t always use face background color. | |
7399 nil never use face background color. | |
7400 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used. | |
7401 | |
7402 *** N-up printing (subgroup) | |
7403 | |
7404 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per | |
7405 sheet of paper. | |
7406 | |
7407 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt) | |
7408 between the sheet border and the n-up printing. | |
7409 | |
7410 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around | |
7411 each page. | |
7412 | |
7413 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled | |
7414 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for | |
7415 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix: | |
7416 | |
7417 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12 | |
7418 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 | |
7419 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 | |
7420 | |
7421 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9 | |
7422 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 | |
7423 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 | |
7424 | |
7425 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12 | |
7426 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11 | |
7427 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10 | |
7428 | |
7429 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3 | |
7430 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2 | |
7431 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1 | |
7432 | |
7433 Any other value is treated as `left-top'. | |
7434 | |
7435 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup) | |
7436 | |
7437 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or | |
7438 RGB color. | |
7439 | |
7440 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes | |
7441 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+' | |
7442 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed): | |
7443 | |
7444 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow' | |
7445 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
7446 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7447 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7448 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7449 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + | |
7450 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + | |
7451 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + | |
7452 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7453 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7454 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7455 10 + 10 + | |
7456 11 + 11 + | |
7457 -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
7458 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
7459 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 + | |
7460 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 + | |
7461 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 + | |
7462 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7463 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7464 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
7465 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 + | |
7466 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 + | |
7467 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 + | |
7468 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX + | |
7469 22 + 22 + | |
7470 -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
7471 | |
7472 Any other value is treated as `nil'. | |
7473 | |
7474 | |
7475 *** Printer management (subgroup) | |
7476 | |
7477 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by | |
7478 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when | |
7479 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr | |
7480 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set | |
7481 to "-P". | |
7482 | |
7483 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual | |
7484 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's | |
7485 non-nil, manual feeding takes place. | |
7486 | |
7487 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04) | |
7488 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means | |
7489 do so. | |
7490 | |
7491 *** Page settings (subgroup) | |
7492 | |
7493 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an | |
7494 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size | |
7495 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used | |
7496 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if | |
7497 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated | |
7498 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to | |
7499 `setpagedevice'. | |
7500 | |
7501 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for | |
7502 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means | |
7503 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees). | |
7504 | |
7505 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If | |
7506 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be | |
7507 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO) | |
7508 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that | |
7509 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than | |
7510 its TO, are ignored. | |
7511 | |
7512 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd | |
7513 pages. Valid values are: | |
7514 | |
7515 nil print all pages. | |
7516 | |
7517 `even-page' print only even pages. | |
7518 | |
7519 `odd-page' print only odd pages. | |
7520 | |
7521 `even-sheet' print only even sheets. | |
7522 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
7523 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll | |
7524 print only the even sheet of paper. | |
7525 | |
7526 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets. | |
7527 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
7528 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print | |
7529 only the odd sheet of paper. | |
7530 | |
7531 Any other value is treated as nil. | |
7532 | |
7533 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages | |
7534 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by | |
7535 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have: | |
7536 | |
7537 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20)) | |
7538 | |
7539 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and | |
7540 `ps-n-up-printing', we get: | |
7541 | |
7542 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1: | |
7543 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
7544 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 | |
7545 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
7546 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
7547 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
7548 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
7549 | |
7550 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2: | |
7551 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
7552 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20 | |
7553 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20 | |
7554 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15 | |
7555 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16 | |
7556 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20 | |
7557 | |
7558 *** Miscellany (subgroup) | |
7559 | |
7560 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler | |
7561 messages should be sent. | |
7562 | |
7563 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in | |
7564 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable | |
7565 `ps-user-defined-prologue'. | |
7566 | |
7567 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers. | |
7568 | |
7569 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in | |
7570 points for line numbers. | |
7571 | |
7572 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line | |
7573 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation. | |
7574 | |
7575 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which | |
7576 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set | |
7577 to 2, the printing will look like: | |
7578 | |
7579 1 one line | |
7580 one line | |
7581 3 one line | |
7582 one line | |
7583 5 one line | |
7584 one line | |
7585 ... | |
7586 | |
7587 Valid values are: | |
7588 | |
7589 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are | |
7590 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1 | |
7591 is used. | |
7592 | |
7593 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a | |
7594 zebra stripe is to be printed. | |
7595 | |
7596 Any other value is treated as `zebra'. | |
7597 | |
7598 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in | |
7599 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if | |
7600 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to | |
7601 3, the output will look like: | |
7602 | |
7603 one line | |
7604 one line | |
7605 3 one line | |
7606 one line | |
7607 one line | |
7608 6 one line | |
7609 one line | |
7610 one line | |
7611 9 one line | |
7612 one line | |
7613 ... | |
7614 | |
7615 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory | |
7616 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found. | |
7617 | |
7618 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points, | |
7619 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
7620 `ps-font-size'). | |
7621 | |
7622 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing, | |
7623 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
7624 `ps-font-size'). | |
7625 | |
7626 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter. | |
7627 | |
7628 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the | |
7629 start and end of a region to cut out when printing. | |
30922 | 7630 |
7631 ** hideshow changes. | |
7632 | |
7633 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
7634 C++, ; for lisp). | |
7635 | |
7636 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
7637 | |
7638 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
7639 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
7640 | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
7641 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
30922 | 7642 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
7643 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
7644 | |
7645 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
7646 robust and a lot faster. | |
7647 | |
7648 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | |
7649 | |
7650 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
7651 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
7652 documentation for more details. | |
7653 | |
7654 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
7655 | |
7656 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
7657 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
7658 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
7659 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
7660 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
7661 | |
7662 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
7663 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
7664 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
7665 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
7666 | |
7667 ** Font Lock mode | |
7668 | |
7669 *** Custom support | |
7670 | |
7671 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
7672 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
7673 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
7674 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
7675 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
7676 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
7677 | |
7678 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
7679 | |
7680 *** Maximum decoration | |
7681 | |
7682 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
7683 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
7684 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
7685 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
7686 to get the old behavior. | |
7687 | |
7688 *** New support | |
7689 | |
7690 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
7691 | |
7692 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
7693 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
7694 | |
7695 *** Configurable support | |
7696 | |
7697 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
7698 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
7699 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
7700 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
7701 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
7702 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
7703 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
7704 | |
7705 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
7706 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
7707 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
7708 | |
7709 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
7710 | |
7711 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
7712 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
7713 for any mode. | |
7714 | |
7715 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
7716 | |
7717 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
7718 | |
7719 in your ~/.emacs. | |
7720 | |
7721 *** New faces | |
7722 | |
7723 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
7724 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
7725 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
7726 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
7727 | |
7728 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
7729 | |
7730 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
7731 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
7732 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
7733 | |
7734 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
7735 | |
7736 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
7737 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
7738 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
7739 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
7740 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
7741 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
7742 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
7743 | |
7744 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
7745 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
7746 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
7747 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
7748 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
7749 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
7750 | |
7751 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
7752 | |
7753 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
7754 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
7755 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
7756 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
7757 | |
7758 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
7759 settings. | |
7760 | |
7761 ** Ada mode changes. | |
7762 | |
7763 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
7764 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
7765 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
7766 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
7767 stubs. | |
7768 | |
7769 *** There are two new commands: | |
7770 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
7771 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
7772 | |
7773 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
7774 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
7775 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | |
7776 | |
7777 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
7778 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
7779 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
7780 | |
7781 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
7782 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
7783 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
7784 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
7785 | |
7786 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
7787 | |
7788 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
7789 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
7790 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
7791 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
7792 have any effect. | |
7793 | |
7794 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
7795 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
7796 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
7797 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
7798 | |
7799 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
7800 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
7801 | |
7802 ** Changes to the emacsclient program | |
7803 | |
7804 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or | |
7805 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
7806 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
7807 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
7808 | |
7809 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
7810 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | |
7811 buffer in Emacs. | |
7812 | |
7813 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to | |
7814 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable | |
7815 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line | |
7816 option takes precedence. | |
7817 | |
7818 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | |
7819 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
7820 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
7821 | |
7822 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
7823 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
7824 the current defun. | |
7825 | |
7826 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
7827 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
7828 | |
7829 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
7830 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
7831 necessary). | |
7832 | |
7833 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
7834 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
7835 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
7836 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
7837 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
7838 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
7839 | |
7840 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
7841 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
7842 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
7843 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
7844 | |
7845 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
7846 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
7847 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
7848 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
7849 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
7850 | |
7851 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
7852 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
7853 | |
7854 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
7855 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
7856 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
7857 | |
7858 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
7859 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
7860 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
7861 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
7862 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
7863 | |
7864 ** RefTeX mode | |
7865 | |
7866 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
7867 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
7868 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
7869 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
7870 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
7871 | |
7872 C-c ( reftex-label | |
7873 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | |
7874 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
7875 | |
7876 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
7877 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
7878 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
7879 | |
7880 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
7881 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
7882 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
7883 | |
7884 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
7885 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
7886 | |
7887 C-c = reftex-toc | |
7888 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
7889 can quickly jump to every section. | |
7890 | |
7891 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | |
7892 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
7893 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
7894 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
7895 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
7896 | |
7897 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7898 | |
7899 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
7900 | |
7901 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
7902 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
7903 | |
7904 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
7905 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
7906 | |
7907 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
7908 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
7909 | |
7910 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
7911 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
7912 appropriate functions. | |
7913 | |
7914 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
7915 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
7916 | |
7917 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
7918 been cleaned. | |
7919 | |
7920 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
7921 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
7922 | |
7923 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
7924 shall be delimited. | |
7925 | |
7926 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
7927 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
7928 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
7929 | |
7930 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
7931 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
7932 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
7933 | |
7934 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
7935 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
7936 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
7937 documentation). | |
7938 | |
7939 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
7940 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
7941 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
7942 | |
7943 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
7944 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
7945 | |
7946 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
7947 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
7948 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
7949 | |
7950 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
7951 | |
7952 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
7953 | |
7954 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
7955 from alien sources. | |
7956 | |
7957 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
7958 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
7959 crossref entries. | |
7960 | |
7961 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
7962 region. | |
7963 | |
7964 *** Added support for imenu. | |
7965 | |
7966 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
7967 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
7968 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
7969 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
7970 | |
7971 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
7972 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
7973 | |
7974 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
7975 | |
7976 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. | |
7977 | |
7978 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | |
7979 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
7980 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
7981 as an argument. | |
7982 | |
7983 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
7984 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
7985 | |
7986 ** browse-url changes | |
7987 | |
7988 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
7989 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
7990 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
7991 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
7992 customization variables. | |
7993 | |
7994 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
7995 | |
7996 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
7997 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
7998 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
7999 | |
8000 ** Changes in Ediff | |
8001 | |
8002 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
8003 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
8004 | |
8005 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
8006 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
8007 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
8008 directories). | |
8009 | |
8010 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
8011 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
8012 files in the same directory. | |
8013 | |
8014 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
8015 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
8016 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
8017 | |
8018 ** Changes in Viper | |
8019 | |
8020 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
8021 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | |
8022 instead of vip-. | |
8023 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
8024 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | |
8025 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | |
8026 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
8027 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
8028 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
8029 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
8030 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
8031 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
8032 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
8033 | |
8034 ** Etags changes. | |
8035 | |
8036 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
8037 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
8038 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
8039 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
8040 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
8041 | |
8042 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
8043 | |
8044 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
8045 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
8046 | |
8047 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
8048 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
8049 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
8050 | |
8051 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
8052 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
8053 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
8054 methods and protocols. | |
8055 | |
8056 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
8057 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
8058 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
8059 paragraph name. | |
8060 | |
8061 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
8062 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
8063 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
8064 | |
8065 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
8066 in files has changed slightly. | |
8067 | |
8068 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
8069 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
8070 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
8071 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
8072 | |
8073 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
8074 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
8075 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
8076 reasons. | |
8077 | |
8078 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
8079 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
8080 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
8081 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
8082 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
8083 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
8084 | |
8085 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
8086 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
8087 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
8088 | |
8089 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
8090 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
8091 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
8092 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
8093 | |
8094 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
8095 details. | |
8096 | |
8097 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
8098 | |
8099 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
8100 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
8101 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
8102 | |
8103 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
8104 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
8105 into Emacs. | |
8106 | |
8107 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
8108 | |
8109 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
8110 | |
8111 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
8112 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
8113 | |
8114 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
8115 | |
8116 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
8117 in shell buffers. | |
8118 | |
8119 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
8120 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
8121 and `elint-defun'. | |
8122 | |
8123 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
8124 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
8125 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
8126 strings or comments. | |
8127 | |
8128 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
8129 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
8130 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
8131 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
8132 at these points. | |
8133 | |
8134 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
8135 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
8136 | |
8137 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
8138 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
8139 | |
8140 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
8141 | |
8142 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
8143 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
8144 | |
8145 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
8146 | |
8147 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
8148 | |
8149 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
8150 | |
8151 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
8152 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
8153 | |
8154 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
8155 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
8156 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
8157 original place after inserting the copy. | |
8158 | |
8159 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
8160 on the buffer. | |
8161 | |
8162 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
8163 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
8164 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
8165 | |
8166 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
8167 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
8168 -or- | |
8169 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
8170 | |
8171 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
8172 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
8173 | |
8174 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
8175 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
8176 | |
8177 *** ogonek | |
8178 | |
8179 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
8180 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
8181 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
8182 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
8183 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
8184 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
8185 instance) and vice versa. | |
8186 | |
8187 To use this package load it using | |
8188 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
8189 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
8190 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | |
8191 M-x ogonek-how -- in English | |
8192 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
8193 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
8194 | |
8195 *** Interface to ph. | |
8196 | |
8197 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
8198 | |
8199 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
8200 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
8201 these servers. | |
8202 | |
8203 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
8204 | |
8205 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
8206 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
8207 while the real cursor does not move. | |
8208 | |
8209 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
8210 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
8211 | |
8212 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
8213 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
8214 | |
8215 ** movemail change | |
8216 | |
8217 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
8218 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
8219 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
8220 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
8221 | |
8222 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
8223 |
30922 | 8224 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
8225 | |
8226 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
8227 | |
8228 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
8229 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
8230 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
8231 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
8232 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
8233 | |
8234 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
8235 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
8236 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
8237 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
8238 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
8239 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
8240 |
30922 | 8241 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
8242 | |
8243 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
8244 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
8245 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
8246 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
8247 | |
8248 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
8249 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
8250 | |
8251 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
8252 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
8253 "win". | |
8254 | |
8255 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
8256 | |
8257 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
8258 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
8259 | |
8260 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
8261 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
8262 or by the user. | |
8263 | |
8264 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
8265 | |
8266 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
8267 | |
8268 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
8269 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
8270 | |
8271 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
8272 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
8273 its argument. | |
8274 | |
8275 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
8276 | |
8277 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
8278 | |
8279 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
8280 | |
8281 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
8282 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
8283 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
8284 `format' function. | |
8285 | |
8286 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
8287 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
8288 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
8289 | |
8290 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
8291 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
8292 adding one of these suffixes. | |
8293 | |
8294 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
8295 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
8296 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | |
8297 | |
8298 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
8299 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
8300 | |
8301 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
8302 | |
8303 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
8304 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
8305 | |
8306 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
8307 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
8308 | |
8309 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
8310 | |
8311 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
8312 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
8313 | |
8314 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
8315 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
8316 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
8317 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
8318 | |
8319 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
8320 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
8321 of the last form. | |
8322 | |
8323 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
8324 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
8325 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
8326 as the last form. | |
8327 | |
8328 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
8329 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
8330 matches. | |
8331 | |
8332 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
8333 | |
8334 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
8335 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
8336 Then it returns that string. | |
8337 | |
8338 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
8339 | |
8340 (with-output-to-string | |
8341 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
8342 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
8343 | |
8344 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
8345 | |
8346 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
8347 is non-nil. | |
8348 | |
8349 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
8350 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
8351 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
8352 | |
8353 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
8354 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
8355 | |
8356 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
8357 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
8358 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
8359 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
8360 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
8361 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
8362 | |
8363 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
8364 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
8365 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
8366 characters". | |
8367 | |
8368 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
8369 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
8370 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
8371 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
8372 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
8373 | |
8374 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
8375 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
8376 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
8377 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
8378 | |
8379 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
8380 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
8381 | |
8382 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
8383 | |
8384 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | |
8385 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
8386 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
8387 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
8388 guaranteed. | |
8389 | |
8390 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
8391 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
8392 character). | |
8393 | |
8394 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
8395 | |
8396 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
8397 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8398 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8399 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8400 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
8401 | |
8402 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
8403 | |
8404 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
8405 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
8406 more than the number of characters. | |
8407 | |
8408 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
8409 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
8410 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
8411 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
8412 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
8413 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
8414 | |
8415 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
8416 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
8417 | |
8418 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
8419 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
8420 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
8421 character, sref signals an error. | |
8422 | |
8423 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
8424 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
8425 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
8426 | |
8427 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
8428 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
8429 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
8430 | |
8431 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
8432 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
8433 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
8434 | |
8435 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
8436 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
8437 | |
8438 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
8439 | |
8440 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
8441 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
8442 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
8443 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
8444 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
8445 | |
8446 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
8447 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
8448 | |
8449 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
8450 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
8451 | |
8452 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
8453 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
8454 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
8455 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
8456 | |
8457 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
8458 | |
8459 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
8460 | |
8461 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
8462 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
8463 are not included in the resulting value. | |
8464 | |
8465 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
8466 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
8467 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
8468 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
8469 | |
8470 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
8471 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
8472 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
8473 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
8474 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
8475 column START-COLUMN. | |
8476 | |
8477 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
8478 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
8479 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
8480 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
8481 changed text, before the change. | |
8482 | |
8483 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
8484 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
8485 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
8486 | |
8487 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
8488 | |
8489 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
8490 | |
8491 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
8492 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
8493 | |
8494 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
8495 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
8496 which identify the character within that character set. | |
8497 | |
8498 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
8499 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
8500 opposite of split-char. | |
8501 | |
8502 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
8503 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
8504 | |
8505 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
8506 of all the characters in a string. | |
8507 | |
8508 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
8509 and specifying coding systems. | |
8510 | |
8511 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
8512 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
8513 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
8514 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
8515 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
8516 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
8517 | |
8518 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
8519 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
8520 | |
8521 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
8522 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
8523 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
8524 | |
8525 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
8526 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
8527 to match against a file name. | |
8528 | |
8529 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
8530 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
8531 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
8532 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
8533 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
8534 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
8535 | |
8536 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
8537 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
8538 | |
8539 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
8540 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
8541 | |
8542 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
8543 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
8544 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
8545 service names. | |
8546 | |
8547 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
8548 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
8549 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
8550 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
8551 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
8552 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
8553 | |
8554 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
8555 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
8556 | |
8557 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
8558 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
8559 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
8560 start the subprocess. | |
8561 | |
8562 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
8563 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
8564 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
8565 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
8566 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
8567 | |
8568 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
8569 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
8570 subprocess. | |
8571 | |
8572 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
8573 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
8574 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
8575 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
8576 | |
8577 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
8578 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
8579 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
8580 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
8581 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
8582 system for one operation at a time. | |
8583 | |
8584 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
8585 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
8586 | |
8587 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
8588 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
8589 The value is a cons cell, | |
8590 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
8591 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
8592 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
8593 input to the subprocess. | |
8594 | |
8595 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
8596 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
8597 | |
8598 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
8599 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
8600 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
8601 | |
8602 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
8603 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
8604 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
8605 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
8606 customization. | |
8607 | |
8608 Thus, instead of writing | |
8609 | |
8610 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
8611 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
8612 | |
8613 you would now write this: | |
8614 | |
8615 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
8616 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
8617 :type 'boolean | |
8618 :group foo) | |
8619 | |
8620 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
8621 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
8622 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
8623 for a description of them. | |
8624 | |
8625 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
8626 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
8627 | |
8628 (defgroup ispell nil | |
8629 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
8630 :group 'processes) | |
8631 | |
8632 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
8633 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
8634 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
8635 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
8636 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
8637 | |
8638 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
8639 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
8640 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
8641 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
8642 first-level subgroups. | |
8643 | |
8644 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
8645 | |
8646 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
8647 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
8648 | |
8649 ** easy-mmode | |
8650 | |
8651 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
8652 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
8653 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
8654 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
8655 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
8656 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
8657 | |
8658 ** Text property changes | |
8659 | |
8660 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
8661 text property. | |
8662 | |
8663 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
8664 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
8665 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
8666 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
8667 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
8668 | |
8669 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
8670 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
8671 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
8672 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
8673 | |
8674 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
8675 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
8676 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
8677 | |
8678 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
8679 | |
8680 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
8681 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
8682 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
8683 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
8684 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
8685 make the overlay visible. | |
8686 | |
8687 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
8688 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
8689 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
8690 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
8691 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
8692 t when it should hide it. | |
8693 | |
8694 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
8695 | |
8696 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
8697 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | |
8698 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
8699 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | |
8700 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
8701 Here is an example of how to do this: | |
8702 | |
8703 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
8704 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
8705 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | |
8706 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
8707 | |
8708 ... | |
8709 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
8710 | |
8711 ... | |
8712 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
8713 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
8714 ;; Or respectively: | |
8715 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
8716 | |
8717 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
8718 | |
8719 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
8720 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
8721 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
8722 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
8723 | |
8724 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
8725 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
8726 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
8727 | |
8728 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
8729 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
8730 | |
8731 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
8732 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
8733 | |
8734 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
8735 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
8736 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
8737 | |
8738 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
8739 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
8740 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
8741 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
8742 | |
8743 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
8744 of the current buffer. | |
8745 | |
8746 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
8747 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
8748 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
8749 | |
8750 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
8751 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
8752 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
8753 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
8754 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
8755 | |
8756 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
8757 text property. | |
8758 | |
8759 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
8760 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
8761 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
8762 | |
8763 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
8764 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
8765 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
8766 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
8767 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
8768 | |
8769 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
8770 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
8771 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
8772 | |
8773 ** Changes in face features | |
8774 | |
8775 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
8776 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
8777 | |
8778 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
8779 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
8780 | |
8781 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
8782 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
8783 | |
8784 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
8785 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
8786 | |
8787 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
8788 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
8789 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
8790 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
8791 overlay property). | |
8792 | |
8793 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
8794 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
8795 | |
8796 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
8797 | |
8798 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
8799 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
8800 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
8801 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
8802 | |
8803 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
8804 begins with ~. | |
8805 | |
8806 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
8807 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
8808 | |
8809 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
8810 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
8811 | |
8812 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
8813 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
8814 | |
8815 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
8816 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
8817 | |
8818 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
8819 (formerly it did not). | |
8820 | |
8821 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
8822 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
8823 | |
8824 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
8825 instead of constant strings. | |
8826 | |
8827 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
8828 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
8829 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
8830 | |
8831 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
8832 in the same way as before. | |
8833 | |
8834 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
8835 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
8836 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
8837 | |
8838 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
8839 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
8840 else, and returns nil. | |
8841 | |
8842 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
8843 directory cannot be listed. | |
8844 | |
8845 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
8846 | |
8847 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
8848 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
8849 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
8850 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
8851 ways: | |
8852 | |
8853 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
8854 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
8855 | |
8856 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
8857 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
8858 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
8859 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
8860 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
8861 | |
8862 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
8863 argument in this way. | |
8864 | |
8865 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
8866 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
8867 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
8868 | |
8869 ** Echo area features | |
8870 | |
8871 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
8872 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
8873 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
8874 after the echo area is cleared. | |
8875 | |
8876 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
8877 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
8878 | |
8879 ** Keyboard input features | |
8880 | |
8881 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
8882 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
8883 | |
8884 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
8885 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
8886 by keyboard macros. | |
8887 | |
8888 ** Frame-related changes | |
8889 | |
8890 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
8891 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
8892 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
8893 | |
8894 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
8895 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
8896 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
8897 | |
8898 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
8899 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
8900 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
8901 in the selected frame. | |
8902 | |
8903 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
8904 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
8905 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
8906 | |
8907 ** X Windows features | |
8908 | |
8909 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
8910 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
8911 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
8912 | |
8913 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
8914 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
8915 | |
8916 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
8917 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
8918 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
8919 | |
8920 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
8921 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
8922 | |
8923 ** Subprocess features | |
8924 | |
8925 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
8926 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
8927 automatically. | |
8928 | |
8929 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
8930 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
8931 | |
8932 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
8933 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
8934 | |
8935 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
8936 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
8937 | |
8938 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
8939 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
8940 goes after the other menu items. | |
8941 | |
8942 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
8943 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | |
8944 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | |
8945 are in use. | |
8946 | |
8947 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
8948 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
8949 | |
8950 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
8951 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
8952 form. | |
8953 | |
8954 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
8955 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
8956 but its hook is still run. | |
8957 | |
8958 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
8959 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
8960 | |
8961 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
8962 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
8963 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
8964 | |
8965 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
8966 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
8967 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
8968 warned. | |
8969 | |
8970 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
8971 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
8972 | |
8973 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
8974 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
8975 functions like display-time. | |
8976 | |
8977 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
8978 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
8979 | |
8980 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
8981 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
8982 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
8983 | |
8984 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
8985 if there is an error in compilation. | |
8986 | |
8987 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
8988 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
8989 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
8990 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
8991 | |
8992 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
8993 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
8994 the *scratch* buffer. | |
8995 | |
8996 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
8997 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
8998 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
8999 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
9000 | |
9001 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
9002 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
9003 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
9004 | |
9005 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
9006 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
9007 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
9008 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
9009 | |
9010 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
9011 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
9012 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
9013 | |
9014 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
9015 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
9016 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
9017 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
9018 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
9019 files at all. | |
9020 | |
9021 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
9022 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
9023 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
9024 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
9025 | |
9026 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
9027 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
9028 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
9029 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
9030 | |
9031 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
9032 | |
9033 ** imenu.el changes. | |
9034 | |
9035 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
9036 item from menu created by imenu. | |
9037 | |
9038 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
9039 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
9040 select one of those items. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
9041 |
30922 | 9042 * For older news, see the file ONEWS |
25853 | 9043 |
9044 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
9045 Copyright information: | |
9046 | |
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
9047 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 9048 |
9049 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
9050 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
9051 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
9052 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
9053 | |
9054 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
9055 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
9056 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
9057 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
9058 |
25853 | 9059 Local variables: |
9060 mode: outline | |
9061 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
9062 end: |